Infiniti QX60 (2015) Bedienungsanleitung

Infiniti Auto QX60 (2015)

Lesen Sie kostenlos die 📖 deutsche Bedienungsanleitung für Infiniti QX60 (2015) (554 Seiten) in der Kategorie Auto. Dieser Bedienungsanleitung war für 14 Personen hilfreich und wurde von 2 Benutzern mit durchschnittlich 4.5 Sternen bewertet

Download PDF

Seite 1/554

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking

about vehicle design. It integrates advanced en-

gineering and superior craftsmanship with a

simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated

with traditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and

beauty. The car itself is important, but so is the

sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its

driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel with

the INFINITI — from the way it looks and drives to

the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the

fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s

Manual immediately. It explains all of the features,

controls and performance characteristics of your

INFINITI; it also provides important instructions

and safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

is included in your Owner’s literature port-

folio. The INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide explains details about main-

taining and servicing your vehicle. Always

carry it with you when you take your vehicle

to an INFINITI retailer. The Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet contents provide complete

information about all warranties covering

this vehicle, the requirements to keep the

warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI

Roadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care

and Lemon Law Information Booklet will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-

hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-

cessories installed by INFINITI or by your INFINITI

retailer prior to delivery. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

cautions and instructions concerning proper use

of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. See an INFINITI retailer for

details concerning the particular accessories

with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive

models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning

of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. Be sure to read

“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-

ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

For additional information, refer to “On-

pavement and off-road driving

precautions,” “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability and may

even violate governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or performance prob-

lems resulting from modifications may

not be covered under INFINITI warranties.

This manual includes information for all features

and equipment available on this model. Features

and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-

ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,

date of production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed on

your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change

specifications, performance, design or compo-

nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-

tion. From time to time, INFINITI may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with the

most accurate information currently available.

Please carefully read and retain with this manual

all revision updates sent to you by INFINITI to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-

date information regarding your vehicle. Current

versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner section

of the INFINITI website at

https://owners.infinitiusa.com/owners/

navigation/manualsandGuides. If you have

questions concerning any information in your

Owner’s Manual, contact INFINITI Consumer Af-

fairs. See the INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PRO-

GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual for contact

information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Clarion.

APD1005

SiriusXM® services

require a subscription

after trial period and

are sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in the

48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM

satellite service is

also available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CARES...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI retailer are

our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your INFINITI

retailer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide INFINITI directly with comments or ques-

tions, please contact our (INFINITI’s) Consumer

Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (on dash panel)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your INFINITI retailer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to INFINITI with the information on

the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada. com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.infinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers)

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . ..............0-8

Warning/indicator lights ............................0-9

1. Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-2)

2. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-48)

4. Seat belts (P. 1-16)

5. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-11)

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-48)

7. Front seats (P. 1-2)

8. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P.1-48)

9. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-48)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag (P. 1-48)

11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-26)

12. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor

(located on bottom of seatback)

(P. 1-26)

13. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap

anchor (located on bottom of seatback)

(P. 1-26)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2032

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Front camera (P. 4-27)

2. Engine hood (P. 3-22)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch,

wiper blades (P. 2-27, 8-19)

4. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

system/Lane Departure Prevention

(LDP) system (if so equipped)(P. 5-25)

5. Power windows (P. 2-53)

6. Door locks, INFINITI Intelligent Key,

keys (P. 3-5, 3-2)

7. Mirrors, side camera (P. 3-32, 4-27)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

9. Flat tire (P. 6-3)

10. Tire chains (P. 8-31)

11. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

12. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-31)

13. Fog light switch (P. 2-31)

14. Corner sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-102)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2212

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P.4-97)

2. Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-30)

3. Corner sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-102)

4. Liftgate release (P. 3-23)

5. Rearview camera (P.4-21, 4-27)

6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-27, P. 9-2)

8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-27)

9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-7)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2213

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power moonroof, panoramic sunshade

(if so equipped) (P. 2-55)

2. Console box (P. 2-47)

3. Map lights (P. 2-59)

4. Sun visors (P. 3-31)

5. Glove box (P. 2-47)

6. Seats (P. 1-2)

7. Cup holders (P. 2-47)

8. Luggage hooks (P. 2-47)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2235

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vent (P. 4-44)

2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-31)

3. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-35)

4. Meters, gauges, warning/indicator

lights and Vehicle Information Display

(P. 2-4, 2-8, 2-16)

5. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn

(P. 1-48, P. 2-37)

6. Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)

system switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-44)

7. Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-5)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-27, P. 2-30)

9. Vent (P. 4-44)

10. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch (P. 2-31)

11. Display screen (P. 4-4, 4-10)

(if so equipped)

12. Automatic heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-45)

13. Vent (P. 4-44)

14. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-48)

15. Vent (P. 4-44)

16. Glove box (P. 2-50)

17. Control Panel with Navigation System/

Control Panel without Navigation

System (P. 4-4, 4-10)

18. Power outlet (P.2-44)

19. Audio system controls (P. 4-53)

20. Shift lever (P. 5-17)

21. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-48)

LIC2290

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

22. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-12)

24. Cruise control main/set switches and

Intelligent cruise control main/set

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-51,

P.5-52)

25. Dynamic Driver Assistance switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-72)

26. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-29)

27. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-109, 4-123)

28. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-95)

29. Hood release (P. 3-22)

30. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-43)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)

Headlight aiming control (P. 2-31)

Warning System switch

(if so equipped) (P. 6-2)

Power inverter switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-44)

Liftgate opener switch (P. 3-23)

Power liftgate main switch (P. 3-23)

31. Control panel and Vehicle Information

Display switches (P. 4-4, 2-16)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

3. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)

4. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

8. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

9. Fuse box/fusible links (P. 8-22)

10. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

11. Battery (P. 8-14)

12. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

13. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)

14. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LDI2498

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-9

Brake warning light 2-9

Charge warning

light

2-9

Engine oil pressure

warning light

2-10

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-10

Low windshield-

washer fluid warning

light

2-11

Master warning light 2-11

Warning

light

Name Page

Power steering

warning light

2-12

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-12

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-12

Indicator

light

Name Page

Fog light indicator

light

2-13

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-13

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-13

Intelligent Brake

Assist (IBA) off indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-13

Indicator

light

Name Page

Malfunction indica-

tor light (MIL)

2-13

Security indicator

light

2-14

Side light and head-

light indicator light

(green) (if so

equipped)

2-14

Slip indicator light 2-14

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-14

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off

indicator light

2-14

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

MEMO

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front power seat adjustment.....................1-3

2nd row bench seat adjustment ..................1-5

3rd row bench seat adjustment ..................1-7

Armrests ......................................1-8

Flexible seating.................................1-8

Head restraints/headrests .........................1-11

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-12

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-12

Remove ......................................1-13

Removable (without Dual head restraint/

headrest DVD system only) .....................1-13

Install ........................................1-14

Adjust........................................1-14

Folding head restraint/headrest .................1-15

Seat belts .......................................1-16

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-16

Seat belt warning light .........................1-19

Pregnant women ..............................1-19

Injured persons................................1-19

Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function

(front seats) (if so equipped) ....................1-19

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-20

Seat belt extenders ............................1-23

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-24

Child safety ......................................1-24

Infants........................................1-25

Small children.................................1-25

Larger children ................................1-25

Child restraints ...................................1-26

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-26

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System .............................1-28

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH.......................................1-31

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .................................1-33

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH..................................1-36

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ............................1-40

Booster seats .................................1-45

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-48

Precautions on SRS ...........................1-48

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-66

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-66

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

LRS2130

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter

Push the switch up or push down to adjust the

angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable

lower back support to the driver. Move the lever

up or down (manual) or move the switch forward

or backward (power) to adjust the seat lumbar

area.

LRS2131

Manual (if so equipped)

LRS2132

Power (if so equipped)

LRS2133

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar 䊊

1up and hold it while

you slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat

in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊

and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull

the lever 䊊

2up and lean your body forward.

Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-

back for occupants of different sizes for added

comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For

additional information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seat-

back can be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is

in P (Park).

WARNING

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

For additional information, refer to

“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

One touch walk-in function

The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the

vehicle by using the seatback release lever lo-

cated on the upper outboard side of the seatback

on the 2nd row bench seat. If a child safety seat is

installed on the passenger’s side of the 2nd row

seat, the 3rd row can be accessed without re-

moving the child safety seat.

Outboard seats

LRS2143 LRS2142

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Multi-mode

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and seat-

back are locked properly.

CAUTION

●Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat.

●Do not drive with the 2nd row seat

tipped up.

●Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat

to pinch, hit any part of your body or

other people when operating the 2nd

row seat. Make sure the seat path is

clear of all objects before moving the

seat.

To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift

up on the seatback lever located on the upper

outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row

bench seat. This will release the back of the seat

and fold up the seat cushion. This will also re-

lease the seat tracks so you will be able to slide

the seat forward or backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the 3rd

row.

To return the seat to a locked position, push the

upper seatback rearward until the seatback and

tracks are locked. Push the seat cushion down.

Child seat access mode

The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat can be

slid forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row

bench seat without a child safety seat being

removed.

To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift

up on the seatback lever located on the upper

outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row

bench seat. This will release the seatback. Then

tilt the seat and release the tracks so you will be

able to slide the seat forward or backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the

rear seats.

To return the seat to a locked position, push the

upper seatback rearward until the seatback and

track are locked.

WARNING

●Do not leave a child in the child safety

seat when operating the child seat ac-

cess mode.

●When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and seat-

back are locked properly.

CAUTION

●Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat.

●Do not drive with the 2nd row seat

tipped up.

●Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat

to pinch, hit any part of your body or

other people when operating the 2nd

row seat. Make sure the seat path is

clear of all objects before moving the

seat.

Exiting the 3rd row

To exit the 3rd row from either seating position, lift

the upper seatback release lever to the upper-

most position. This will release the back of the

seat, then fold the seat cushion up and release

the tracks.

Slide the entire seat forward.

To return the seat to a locked position, push the

upper seatback rearward until the seatback and

track are locked.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and seat-

back are locked properly.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat.

3RD ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch

located on the outside corner of each seatback.

Lean back until the desired angle is obtained.

To bring the seatback forward again, pull up on

the latch and pull the seatback upright until the

desired angle is obtained.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-

back for occupants of different sizes for added

comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For

additional information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seat-

back can be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is

in P (Park).

WARNING

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

For additional information, refer to

“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

Outboard seats

LRS2147

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

ARMRESTS

The 2nd row bench seat comes equipped with an

armrest. Pull the armrest down until it rests on the

seat cushion.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the fold-down position. In a collision,

people riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or feet

to get caught or pinched in the seat.

●Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may provide

significant protection against injury in

an accident. Always replace and adjust

them properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

●If the head restraints/headrests are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or damage

to the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

WRS0167

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum

cargo hauling:

1. Make sure that the head

restraints/headrests are lowered. To remove

the head restraints/headrests, push and

hold the lock knob while moving the head

restraints/headrests in an upward direction.

Store the head restraints/headrests properly

so it is not loose in the vehicle.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.

3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of the

outboard seats to fold the seatbacks flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seatback

until it latches in place.

3rd row manual folding seats

To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo

capacity:

1. Pull the strap 䊊

1to release the head

restraint/headrest forward.

2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks 䊊

4found on the sides of the cargo

area.

3. Pull up on the latch 䊊

2located in the upper

corner of each seatback and lower the seat-

back forward over the seat base.

LRS2144 LRS2145

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Manual operation to return the 3rd row seats to a

seating position:

1. Use the pull straps 䊊

3to raise each seat-

back. Pull back until the seatback latches

into position. Make sure to properly raise

each seatback to an upright and se-

cured position.

2. Do not use the pull strap to return the head

restraint/headrest to the upright position.

Pull back on the head restraint/headrest until

it latches in the upright position.

Power operation to return the 3rd row seats to a

seating position (if so equipped):

1. Push and hold the corresponding switch

located on the right and left side in the cargo

area.

A beep sounds once and the seatback will be

returned automatically.

A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fully

returned to the seating position.

If the control unit detects any obstacle or mal-

functions while in the power operation, a beep

sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback will re-

turn to the folded position automatically. Check if

there are any obstacles caught that prevent seats

from returning to the folded position. Visit an

INFINITI retailer if the beep still sounds.

CAUTION

When operating the 3rd row power seat-

back return, make sure that the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in the P

(Park) position.

WARNING

●When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraints/headrests must be returned

to the upright position to properly pro-

tect vehicle occupants.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the 3rd row seats when they

are in the fold-down position. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

LRS2623

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Do not fold down the 3rd row seats

when occupants are in the 3rd row seat

area or any luggage is on the 3rd row

seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or feet

to get caught or pinched in the seat.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-

able head restraints/headrests must be

adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint/headrest stalks or

remove the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head

restraint/headrest has been removed. If

the head restraint/headrest was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to fol-

low these instructions can reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

●Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be integrated,

adjustable or non-adjustable.

LRS2308

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

●Adjustable head restraints/headrests have

multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock

them in a desired adjustment position.

●The non-adjustable head

restraints/headrests have a single locking

notch to secure them to the seat frame.

●Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the center

of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

●If the head restraint/headrest has been re-

moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2300 LRS2299

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

REMOVABLE (without Dual head

restraint/headrest DVD system only)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrest

from vehicles equipped with Dual head

restraint/headrest DVD system. Removal

may damage the system wiring.

LRS2302 LRS2302

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint/headrest is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊

1must be installed in the hole with the lock

knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST

To fold the head restraint/headrest, pull the strap

located on the rear of the head restraint/

headrest.

If the head restraint/headrest has been folded,

make sure that it is returned to the upright posi-

tion.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306 LRS2307

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraint/headrest must be returned to the

upright position to properly protect ve-

hicle occupants.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI

strongly encourages you and all of your passen-

gers to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supplemental air

bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appro-

priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-

vated, it cannot be reused and must be

replaced together with the retractor.

See your INFINITI retailer.

●Removal and installation of preten-

sioner system components should be

done by an INFINITI retailer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision by an

INFINITI retailer. INFINITI recommends

that all seat belt assemblies in use dur-

ing a collision be replaced unless the

collision was minor and the belts show

no damage and continue to operate

properly. Seat belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either dam-

age or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are

equipped with a seat belt warning light. The

warning light, located on the instrument panel,

will show the status of the driver and passenger

seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light

will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to

“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH

COMFORT FUNCTION (front seats)

(if so equipped)

The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt with

a motor to help restrain front seat occupants. This

helps reduce the risk of injury in a collision.

The motor retracts the seat belt under the follow-

ing emergency conditions:

●During emergency braking.

●During sudden steering maneuvers

●Activation of the Intelligent Brake Assist

(IBA) system. For additional information, re-

fer to “Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

●In the event of certain types of rollover colli-

sions.

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active when:

●the seat belt is not fastened.

●the vehicle speed is under 10 mph (15 km/h)

during emergency braking.

●the vehicle speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h)

during sudden steering maneuvers or cer-

tain types of rollover collisions.

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active when

the brake pedal is not depressed except when

sudden steering maneuvers occur and the Intel-

ligent Brake Assist (IBA) system activates.

The motor also retracts the seat belt when the

seat belt is fastened or unfastened. When the

seat belt is fastened, the motor tightens the seat

belt for a snug fit. When the seat belt is unfas-

tened, the motor retracts the seat belt. If the seat

belt is not fully retracted, the motor retracts the

seat belt when the door is opened.

Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit up-

right and well back.

LRS0786

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

If the motor cannot retract the seat belt when the

seat belt is fastened or unfastened, it may indi-

cate the pre-crash seat belt system has a mal-

function. Have your INFINITI retailer check and

repair the system.

When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly in a

short period of time, the motor may not be able to

retract the seat belt. After 8 minutes, the motor

reactivates and retracts the seat belt. If the seat

belt still cannot be retracted by the motor, the

pre-crash seat belt system has a malfunction.

Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair the

system.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

●Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt cannot

be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,

release the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,

refer to “Seats” in this section.

Front seat shown

LRS2148

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊

2until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the seat

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the re-

tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips 䊊

3as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

4. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-

der and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers some

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks

the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly

or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured

in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be

injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the

buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows.

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about seat belt opera-

tion, see an INFINITI retailer .

䊊

AShoulder belt height adjust button

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

and 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section.

To adjust, push the button and then move the

shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so

that the belt passes over the center of the shoul-

der. The belt should be away from your face and

WRS0139 SSS0896

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release

the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

●The shoulder belt should rest on the

middle of the shoulder. It must not rest

against the neck.

●Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted

in any way.

●Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is

secured by trying to move the shoulder

belt anchor up and down after

adjustment.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when folding

down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on

the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position.

Seat belt extenders are available for the:

●Driver and front passenger seating position

●2nd and 3rd row seating position

See an INFINITI retailer for assistance with pur-

chasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

●Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with INFINITI seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop.

3rd row shown; 2nd row similar

LRS2157

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a child’s neck

with the ALR mode activated, the child can

be seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This can

occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-

buckle the seat belt to release the child. If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to release the

seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraint

●Forward-facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip bones.

In an accident, an improperly fitting seat

belt could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

CHILD SAFETY

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat

belt. For additional information, refer to “Child

restraints” in this section.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. INFINITI recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the height

or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who

outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-

facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child re-

straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and maximum

weight and height recommendations. INFINITI

recommends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-

mum height or weight limit allowed by the child

restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-

straint, INFINITI recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-

der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A

booster seat can only be used in seating posi-

tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has

grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near

the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi-

tioned properly across the lower hips or upper

thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

– INFINITI recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, refer to

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” in this

section.

– Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating air bag could seriously

injure or kill a child. A rear-facing

child restraint must only be used in

the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occupants

or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you

may use either the LATCH anchors or the

seat belt to install the child restraint (not both

at the same time).

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint.

●Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system compat-

ible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint

unless the combined weight of the child and child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the following positions

only:

●2nd row bench seat – outboard seating

positions

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

2nd row center position using the

LATCH system anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH system lower anchor locations -

bench seat

LRS2137

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LRS2146

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

●Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a

collision. A child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

●Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorages, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

2nd row bench seat

LRS2138

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following loca-

tions:

●2nd row bench on the bottom of the seat-

back in the seating positions shown.

●3rd row bench on the bottom of the seat-

back on the passenger side seating position

as shown.

If you have any questions when installing a top

tether strap, consult your INFINITI retailer for

details.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorages,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child

Restraint” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

3rd row bench seat

LRS2508

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the operation

of the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Supplemental

air bag warning light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child

Restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the

LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. For additional information, refer to “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do

not install child restraints that require the use

of a top tether strap in seating positions that

do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for head

restraint/headrest adjustment information.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2398

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 6.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (2nd row bench outboarding seat-

ing positions only).

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section for head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your INFINITI re-

tailer for details.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2554

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the operation

of the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child

Restraint” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-

fore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section. Do not install

child restraints that require the use of a top

tether strap in seating positions that do not

have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Forward-facing – step 10

LRS0865

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section for head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest

does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your INFINITI re-

tailer for details.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

3rd row bench seat

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint

with a top tether strap can only be used on

the passenger side seating position. Do

not place in the driver’s side seating posi-

tion and attempt to angle the tether strap

to the passenger side seating position.

3rd row bench seat

LRS2508

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The passenger side of the 3rd row bench seat is

the seating position that can use a top tether

strap. First, secure the child restraint with the

seat belt, as applicable. First, secure the child

restraint with the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1to the out-

board side of the head restraint/headrest as

shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest

does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your INFINITI re-

tailer for details.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restaints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster

seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured in

a sudden stop or collision greatly

increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle

seatback must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than

the center of the child’s ears, a high back

booster seat should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

when using a booster seat with the seat

belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child re-

straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this

manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

2nd or 3rd rows or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the

booster seat is removed. For additional

information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat being used. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems:

●Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and front passenger in

certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

LRS0865

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side-impact or roll-

over collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain

air bags are designed to inflate and remain in-

flated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the driver and front pas-

senger seat belts and is not a substitute for

them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn

and the occupant seated a suitable distance

away from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belts” in this section for instructions

and precautions on seat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

Advanced Air Bag System monitors the

severity of a collision and seat belt us-

age then inflates the air bags as

needed. Failure to properly wear seat

belts can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an Occupant Classification Sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-

senger air bag OFF under some condi-

tions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

ARS1133

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

●Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints”

in this section.

ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

WRS0431 WRS0365 SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the

side air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do

not hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may

be seriously injured. Be especially care-

ful with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side

shown; passenger side similar)

5. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

6. Crash zone sensor

7. Occupant classification system control unit

8. Occupant Classification Sensor (weight

sensor – located on passenger seat frame )

9. Seat belt with pretensioner

10. Satellite sensors

11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

LRS2534

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s advanced air bag system, please ob-

serve the following items.

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

●Do not store luggage behind the seat

that can press into the seatback.

●Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status light

may illuminate and the supplemental

air bag warning light may flash.

●If a forward-facing child restraint is in-

stalled in the front passenger seat, do

not position the front passenger seat so

the child restraint contacts the instru-

ment panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the sys-

tem may determine the seat is occupied

and the passenger air bag may deploy

in a collision. Also the front passenger

air bag status light may not illuminate.

For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section for in-

formation about installing and using

child restraints.

●Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

●If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating as de-

scribed in this section, please take your

vehicle to your INFINITI retailer to check

the occupant classification system.

●Until you have confirmed with your re-

tailer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in the

rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.

The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper front air bag system opera-

tion.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has dual

stage inflators. It also monitors information from

the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit

(ACU), seat belt buckle sensor and Occupant

Classification Sensor (weight sensor). Inflator

operation is based on the severity of a collision

and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front

passenger, the Occupant Classification Sensor

is also monitored. Based on information from the

sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

crash, depending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted or un-

belted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag

may be automatically turned off under some con-

ditions, depending on the weight detected on the

passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If

the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger

air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is

unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but

the air bag will be off). For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light”

in this section. One front air bag inflating does not

indicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, please contact INFINITI or your INFINITI

retailer. If you are considering modification of

your vehicle due to a disability, you may also

contact INFINITI. Contact information is con-

tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-

senger seated upright as far as practical away

from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The

front air bags inflate quickly in order to help

protect the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can increase the

risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is necessary

for most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-

cerning the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

LRS0865

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

Occupant Classification Sensor (weight sensor)

that turns the front passenger air bag on or off

depending on the weight applied to the passen-

ger seat. The status of the passenger air bag (ON

or OFF) is indicated by a passenger air bag

status light which is located on the instru-

ment panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙

position, the front passenger air bag status light

on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns OFF or remains illumi-

nated depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The

light is OFF and the front passenger air bag

is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in the

Safety section of the owner’s manual:

The light illuminates to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is OFF and will

not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meet the conditions as outlined in the

Safety section of the owner’s manual:

The light is OFF to indicate that the

front passenger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this Occupant

Classification Sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

The Occupant Classification Sensor in this ve-

hicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect

an occupant and objects on the seat by weight.

For example, if a child is in the front passenger

seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed

to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance

with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the

type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its

weight and the child’s weight can be detected

and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the passen-

ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For

small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the

occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-

ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out

of position), this could cause the sensor to turn

the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and

wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-

tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental

air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

INFINITI also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the Occupant

Classification Sensor is designed to operate as

described above to turn the front passenger air

bag OFF for specified child restraints as required

by the regulations. Failing to properly secure

child restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information, refer to “Child

restraints” in this section for proper use and in-

stallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the Occupant

Classification Sensor. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-

tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front pas-

senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-

ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating

that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that

the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is

installed properly, the seat belt is used properly

and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-

minate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your INFINITI retailer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your retailer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. For example, if a

large adult who is sitting in the front passenger

seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag

status light will go from OFF to ON for a few

seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system

operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-

tem checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification system to

classify the right front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions

●Make sure there are no objects weighing

over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or

placed in the seat-back pocket.

●Make sure that a child seat or other object is

not pressing against the rear of the seat-

back.

●Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-

ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-

senger’s seat.

●Make sure that the front seat or seat-back is

not forced back against an object on the

seat or floor behind it.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger’s seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of the Owner’s Manual. Sit upright,

leaning against the seat back, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet comfort-

ably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on the occu-

pant’s lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat

belts” section of the Owner’s Manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-

lowing the system to classify the passenger

before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sys-

tem locks the classification during driving

so it is important that you confirm that the

passenger is properly classified prior to

driving. Also, the occupant classification

system may recalculate the weight of the

occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop

(i.e. stop light, stop sign etc.), so front pas-

senger seat occupants should continue to

remain seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the passenger air bag status light is

incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and

no objects on the front passenger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seat-back

pocket.

●A child seat or other object pressing against

the rear of the seat-back.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger’s seat.

●The front seat or seat-back is forced back

against an object on the seat or floor behind

it.

●An object placed under the front passen-

ger’s seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between door and

cushion.

If the vehicle is moving please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait one minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the passenger air bag status light

will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

If the light is still on after this, the vehicle should

be checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

●Occupant is a small adult →the air bag light

is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then

this may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seat back, and centered on the

seat cushion with feet comfortably extended

to the floor.

●A child seat or other object pressing against

the rear of the seat-back.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger’s seat.

●The front seat or seat-back is forced back

against an object on the seat or floor behind

it.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●An object placed under the front passen-

ger’s seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait one minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the passenger air bag status light

will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

If the light is still on after this, the person should

be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat

and the vehicle should be checked by an INFINITI

retailer as soon as possible.

3. If the light is OFF with small adult, child or

child restraint occupying the front passen-

ger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seat back, and centered

on the seat cushion with feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

●The child restraint is not properly installed,

as outlined in the “Child restraints”section of

the Owner’s Manual.

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seat-back

pocket.

●A child seat or other object pressing against

the rear of the seat-back.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger’s seat.

●The front seat or seat-back is forced back

against an object on the seat or floor behind

it.

●An object placed under the front passen-

ger’s seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

If the vehicle is moving please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait one minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the passenger air bag status light

will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned in

the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked

by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

●Do not place objects with sharp edges

on the seat. Also, do not place heavy

objects on the seat that will leave per-

manent impressions in the seat. Such

objects can damage the seat or Occu-

pant Classification Sensors (weight

sensors). This can affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

●Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or Occupant Classifi-

cation Sensors. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag and result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the Occupant Classifica-

tion Sensor (weight sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

●Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by an INFINITI

retailer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by an

INFINITI retailer. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair

facility. A cracked windshield could af-

fect the function of the supplemental air

bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails in all three rows.

All of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual apply and must be fol-

lowed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity side colli-

sions, although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity impact. They are designed to in-

flate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in

certain types of rollover collisions or near roll-

overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for

example, during severe off-roading) may cause

the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-

sitions in all rows. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating

side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-

sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain

air bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air bags and

curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation. The side

air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short

time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WRS0381

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the cur-

tain air bag systems.

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should be

done by an INFINITI retailer. Installation

of electrical equipment should also be

done by an INFINITI retailer. The SRS

wiring harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the side

air bag or curtain air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are

yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bags and

curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (front

seats)

WARNING

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but a pretensioner is not acti-

vated, be sure to have the pretensioner

system checked and, if necessary, re-

placed by your INFINITI retailer.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioners. Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

●Work around and on the pretensioner

system should be done by an INFINITI

retailer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by an

INFINITI retailer. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the pretensioner

system.

●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner

or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI

retailer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when

the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of

collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same way

as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental air bag warning light” in this sec-

tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunction,

have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visor.

LRS2158

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward

facing child restraint on a seat protected

by an air bag in front of it!

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-

sioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

OFF. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

LRS0100

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

Repair and replacement of these supplemental

air bag systems should be done only by an

INFINITI retailer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, pretensioners and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the mainte-

nance. The ignition switch should always be in

the LOCK position when working under the hood

or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-

vated pretensioners must also be re-

placed. The air bag module and preten-

sioner should be replaced by an

INFINITI retailer. The air bag module

and pretensioner cannot be repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected by an

INFINITI retailer if there is any damage

to the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of a supplemen-

tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the

vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer. In-

correct disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-4

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Tachometer ....................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .......2-8

Checking bulbs ................................2-8

Warning lights .................................2-9

Indicator lights ................................2-13

Audible reminders .............................2-15

Vehicle Information Display ........................2-16

How to use the vehicle information display .......2-16

Startup display ................................2-16

Settings ......................................2-17

Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators.....................................2-22

Security systems .................................2-25

Vehicle security system.........................2-25

INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system ..............2-26

Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-27

Switch operation ..............................2-28

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped) ...............................2-29

Rear window wiper and washer switch..............2-30

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch.....2-31

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-31

Xenon headlights ..............................2-31

Headlight control switch........................2-32

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-35

Instrument brightness control ...................2-35

Turn signal switch .............................2-36

Fog light switch ...............................2-36

Horn ............................................2-37

Heated front seats................................2-37

Heated rear seats (if so equipped)..................2-38

Climate control seat switch (if so equipped) .........2-40

Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .............2-41

Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped)........2-42

Warning systems switch (if so equipped)............2-42

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch...........2-43

Power inverter switch (if so equipped) ..............2-44

Power outlets ....................................2-44

12v outlets ...................................2-44

120v outlet (if so equipped) ....................2-46

Storage .........................................2-47

Map pockets..................................2-47

Seatback pockets .............................2-47

Sunglasses holder.............................2-47

Cup holders ..................................2-48

Glove box ....................................2-50

Console box ..................................2-50

Storage tray ..................................2-51

Luggage hooks................................2-51

Cargo area storage bin.........................2-52

Roof rack (if so equipped) ......................2-52

Windows ........................................2-53

Power windows ...............................2-53

Moonroof ........................................2-55

Power moonroof...............................2-55

Panoramic sunshade (if so equipped) ............2-57

Interior light ......................................2-58

Console light..................................2-59

Personal lights ...................................2-59

Map lights .......................................2-59

Cargo light ......................................2-60

HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) ....2-60

Programming HomeLink® ......................2-61

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers....................2-62

Operating the HomeLink® universal

transceiver....................................2-63

Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-63

Clearing the programmed information ............2-63

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button......2-63

If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-64

1. Vent (P. 4-44)

2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-31)

3. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-35)

4. Meters, gauges, warning/indicator

lights and Vehicle Information Display

(P. 2-4, 2-8, 2-16)

5. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn

(P. 1-48, P. 2-37)

6. Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)

system switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-44)

7. Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-5)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-27, P. 2-30)

9. Vent (P. 4-44)

10. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch (P. 2-31)

11. Display screen (P. 4-4, 4-10)

(if so equipped)

12. Automatic heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-45)

13. Vent (P. 4-44)

14. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-48)

15. Vent (P. 4-44)

16. Glove box (P. 2-50)

17. Control Panel with Navigation System/

Control Panel without Navigation

System (P. 4-4, 4-10)

18. Power outlet (P.2-44)

19. Audio system controls (P. 4-53)

20. Shift lever (P. 5-17)

21. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-48)

LIC2290

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

22. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-12)

24. Cruise control main/set switches and

Intelligent cruise control main/set

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-51,

P.5-52)

25. Dynamic Driver Assistance switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-72)

26. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-29)

27. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-109, 4-123)

28. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-95)

29. Hood release (P. 3-22)

30. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-43)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)

Headlight aiming control (P. 2-31)

Warning System switch

(if so equipped) (P. 6-2)

Power inverter switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-44)

Liftgate opener switch (P. 3-23)

Power liftgate main switch (P. 3-23)

31. Control panel and Vehicle Information

Display switches (P. 4-4, 2-16)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer

2. Warning/indicator lights

3. Vehicle Information Display

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

The vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and

odometer. The speedometer is located on the

right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is

located within the Vehicle Information Display.

LIC2217

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer 䊊

1and the twin trip odometer 䊊

are displayed below the Vehicle Information Dis-

play when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET 䊊

3switch on the right of

the combination meter to change the display as

follows:

Trip →Trip →Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

3for more

than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip

odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to empty

information is also available. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle Information Display” in

this section.

LIC2218 LIC2234

Instruments and controls 2-5

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-

gine speed. Operating the engine in the

red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range 䊊

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the engine. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “If your ve-

hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual for

immediate action required.

LIC2219 LIC2220

2-6 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected by an INFINITI retailer.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

LIC2222

Instruments and controls 2-7

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Side light and headlight indicator light (green) (if

so equipped)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Fog light indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator light

(if so equipped)

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Power steering warning light Security indicator light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off:

, , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-8 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System ABS

warning light illuminates and then turns off. This

indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

the “Starting and driving” section.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. For additional information, re-

fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by an INFINITI re-

tailer.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the ABS warning light illumi-

nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked, and if

necessary, repaired by an INFINITI retailer

promptly. Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt

braking. For additional information, refer to “Anti-

lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this

section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, see an INFINITI

retailer immediately.

Instruments and controls 2-9

CAUTION

●Do not ground electrical accessories di-

rectly to the battery terminal. Doing so

will bypass the variable control system

and the vehicle battery may not charge

completely. For additional information,

refer to “Variable voltage control sys-

tem” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

●Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately, and call a INFINITI retailer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A “Tire Press Low - Add Air” warning also

appears in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all four tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-

sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Press Low - Add Air” warning appears

each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by

an INFINITI retailer. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add

2-10 Instruments and controls

Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS

malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the tire

placard label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjusting

the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced tire pressure will not be in-

dicated, the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-

tact your INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluid

warning light

This light comes on when the windshield-washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer

fluid, as necessary. For additional information,

refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the

master warning light illuminates if any of the follow-

ing are displayed on the vehicle information display:

●No key warning

Instruments and controls 2-11

●Low fuel warning

●Low washer fluid warning

●Parking brake release warning

●Door open warning

●Loose fuel cap warning

●Check tire pressure warning

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Infor-

mation Display” in this section.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-

ing warning light turns off. This indicates that the

electric power steering system is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates

while the engine is running, it may indicate the

power steering system is not functioning properly

and may need servicing. Have the hydraulic pump

electric power steering system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

When the power steering warning light illumi-

nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering but you will still have

control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-

ing effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact air bag,

roof-mounted curtain air bag and pretensioner

systems need servicing and your vehicle must be

taken to an INFINITI retailer:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

2-12 Instruments and controls

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioner systems may not function properly. For

additional information, refer to “Supplemental re-

straint system (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag systems

and/or pretensioner systems will not op-

erate in an accident. To help avoid injury to

yourself or others, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

Fog light indicator light

The front fog light indicator light illuminates when

the front fog lights are ON when the headlights

are ON. For additional information, refer to “Fog

light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be OFF

depending on how the front passenger seat is

being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

OFF indicator light (if so

equipped)

The light illuminates when the Warning System

Switch is off and the IBA is disabled in the vehicle

information display. This indicates that the IBA

system is not operating.

When the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates

while the system is enabled this indicates that the

system control is temporarily disabled.

If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates when the

system is enabled and the Warning System

switch is on, have the system checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out

of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is

installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle

has at least 3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the

engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle

is not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Readiness for

Instruments and controls 2-13

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

●MIL on steady — An emission control system

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning appears in the Vehicle Information

Display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or miss-

ing, tighten or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI

retailer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to an INFINITI retailer.

●MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been

detected which may damage the emission

control system. To reduce or avoid emission

control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI re-

tailer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed

to an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function

indicates the security system equipped on the

vehicle is operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security sys-

tems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green) (if so

equipped)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-

nates when the side light or headlight position is

selected. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system or

the “Traction Control System (TCS)” is operating,

thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction

limits. The road surface may be slippery.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC off

switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the VDC

has been turned off.

Push the VDC off switch again or restart the

engine and the system will be reactivated. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

The VDC light also comes on when the ignition

switch is placed to the ON position. The light will

turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light stays on or comes on

2-14 Instruments and controls

along with the indicator light while you are

driving, have the VDC system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

VDC should remain on unless freeing a

vehicle from mud or snow.

While the VDC system is operating, you might

feel slight vibration or hear the system working

when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this

is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened

while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK

position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle.

Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the

LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Lane departure warning chime (if so

equipped)

When the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) or

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system is on,

the chime sounds if the vehicle is traveling close

to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with

detectable lane markers.

For additional information, refer to “Lane Depar-

ture Warning (LDW) system/Lane Departure

Prevention (LDP) system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

Intelligent Key door buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one

of the following improper operations is found.

●The ignition switch is not returned to the

LOCK position when locking the doors.

●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.

●The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-

hicle when operating the vehicle.

●Any doors are not closed securely when

locking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both

the vehicle and the Intelligent Key System. For

additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intelli-

gent Key” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-15

The vehicle information display is located to the

left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

●Vehicle settings

●Trip computer information

●Drive system warnings and settings (if so

equipped)

●

Cruise control system/Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol (ICC) (if so equipped) system information

●Intelligent Key operation information

●Indicators and warnings

●Tire Pressure information

●Other information

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be changed

using the buttons and ENTER located on

the steering wheel.

1. — to enter the vehicle information

menu items

2. — to navigate through the items in

vehicle information

ENTER — to change or select an item in the

vehicle information display

3. — to go back to the previous menu

The ENTER, and buttons also controls au-

dio and INFINITI controller functions. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Steering wheel switch

for audio control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems” section of

this manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC

position the screens that display in the vehicle

information include:

●Active system status (if so equipped)

●Trip computer

●Tire pressure information

●Fuel economy

●Warnings

Warnings will only display if there are any pres-

ent. For additional information refer to, “Vehicle

information display warnings and indicators” sec-

tion of this manual.

To control what items display in the vehicle infor-

mation display, refer to “Main menu selection”

section of this manual.

LIC2205 LIC2245

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-16 Instruments and controls

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the infor-

mation displayed in the vehicle information display:

●Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

●Vehicle Settings

●Main Menu Selection

●Body Color

●Maintenance

●Alarms

●Language

●Unit

●Welcome Effects

●Factory Reset

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

To change the status, warnings or turn on or off

any of the systems/warnings displayed in the

“Driver Assistance” menu:

Use the button to select and the ENTER

button to change a menu item:

●Driving Aids (if so equipped)

●Back-up Collision Inter. (if so equipped)

●Intelligent Brake Assist (if so equipped)

Driving Aids (if so equipped)

To change the status, warnings or turn on or off

any of the systems/warnings displayed in the

“Driving Aids” menu.

Use the button to select and the ENTER

button to change a menu item:

●Forward

●Warning (FCW)

●Assistance (DCA)

●Lane

●Warning (LDW)

●Assistance (LDP)

●Blind Spot

●Warning (BSW)

●Assistance (BSI)

●Brightness — Bright/STD/Dark

Back-up Collision Interv. (if so equipped)

The Back-up Collision Intervention system can

be changed to be ON when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position and to Auto Resume.

Use the button to select and the ENTER

button to change a menu item:

●Ignition On Status – On/Off

Intelligent Brake Assist (if so equipped)

The intelligent brake assist system can be

enabled/disabled in the vehicle information dis-

play.

Use the button to select and the ENTER

button to change a menu item:

●System – On/Off

Vehicle Settings

Vehicle settings allow the customer to change

settings for rain sensor (if so equipped), interior

lights, Intelligent Key settings, unlock settings

and other vehicle settings.

The vehicle settings can be changed using

the , , and the ENTER buttons.

Welcome light

The welcome light can be set to be ON or OFF.

From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Wel-

come Light”. Use the ENTER button to turn this

feature ON or OFF.

Auto Room Lamp

The interior lights can be set to be ON or OFF if

any door is unlocked. From the Vehicle Settings

menu, select “Auto Room Light”. Use the ENTER

button to turn this feature ON or OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Light Sensitivity

Light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier

based on the brightness outside the vehicle.

From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Light

Sensitivity”. Use the ENTER button to change the

sensitivity.

Light Off Delay

The duration of the automatic headlights can be

changed from 0 to 180 seconds. From the Ve-

hicle Settings menu, select “Light Off Delay”. Use

the ENTER button to change the duration.

Rain Sensor (if so equipped)

The rain sensor can be set to be ON or OFF. From

the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Rain Sensor”.

Use the ENTER button to turn this feature ON or

OFF.

Wiper with Speed

The wiper with speed can be set to be ON or

OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select

“Wiper with Speed”. Use the ENTER button to

turn this feature ON or OFF.

I-Key Door Lock

When this item is turned on, the request switch

on the door is activated. From the Vehicle Set-

tings menu, select “I-Key Door Unlock”. Use the

ENTER button to activate this function.

Selective-Unlock

When this item is turned on, only the driver’s door

is unlocked first after the door unlock operation.

When the door handle request switch on the

driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed

to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is

unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the

door unlock operation is performed again within

1 minute. When this item is turned to OFF, all the

doors will be unlocked after the door unlock

operation is performed once. From the Vehicle

Settings menu, select “Selective Unlock”. Use

the ENTER button to activate this function.

Auto Door Unlock

The auto door unlock function automatically un-

locks all the doors when the shift lever is placed in

the P (Park) position. From the Vehicle Settings

menu, select “Auto Door Unlock”. Use the EN-

TER button to enable/disable this function.

Answer Back Horn

When the answer back horn is on, the horn will

chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once

when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Remote Start (if so equipped)

The remote start function can be turned on or off.

If the setting is OFF the vehicle cannot be started

using the Intelligent Key. From the Vehicle Set-

tings menu, select “Remote Start”. Use the EN-

TER button to enable/disable.

Battery Saver

The battery saver automatically turns off the igni-

tion after a period of time when the ignition switch

is left in the ACC or ON position.

Exit Seat Slide (if so equipped)

When the exit seat slide is on the driver’s seat will

move backward for easy exit when the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position and the

driver’s door is opened.

After getting into the vehicle and placing the

ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s

seat will move to the previous set position. For

additional information, refer to “Automatic drive

positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual regarding setting

the seat position. Use the ENTER button to

enable/disable this function.

Exit steering up (if so equipped)

When the exit steering up feature is turned ON,

the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit

when the ignition switch is in the OFF position

and the driver’s door is opened.

After getting into the vehicle and placing the

ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering

wheel moves to the previous position. For addi-

2-18 Instruments and controls

tional information, refer to “Tilt and telescopic

operation” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual regarding setting

the steering wheel position . Use the ENTER

button to enable/disable this function.

Main Menu Selection

The items that display can be turned

enabled/disabled when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. To change the items

that display.

Use the button to select and the ENTER

button to change a menu item.

●Driver Assistance

●Tire pressures

●Trip computer

●Fuel economy

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

The driver assistance system can be

enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle infor-

mation display when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Driver

Assistance” to display in the vehicle information

display when the ignition is placed in the ON

position.

Trip Computer

The trip computer can be enabled/disabled to

display in the vehicle information display when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Trip

Computer” to display in the vehicle information

display when the ignition is placed in the ON

position.

Fuel Economy

The fuel economy can be enabled/disabled to

display in the vehicle information display when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Fuel

Economy” to display in the vehicle information

display when the ignition is placed in the ON

position.

Tire Pressures

The tire pressures can be enabled/disabled to

display in the vehicle information display when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Tire

Pressures” to display in the vehicle information

display when the ignition is placed in the ON

position.

Body Color

The color of the vehicle that displays in the ve-

hicle information display when the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position can be changed.

Maintenance

The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts

for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the

following:

●Scheduled service

●Tires

●Other

1. Press the button.

2. Use the button until “Settings” is se-

lected, and press ENTER.

3. Select “Maintenance” using the but-

tons and press ENTER.

Service

This indicator appears when the customer set

distance is reached for checking or replacing

maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil

filter and tires. Other maintenance items can in-

clude such things as air filter or tire rotation. You

can set or reset the distance for checking or

replacing the items. You can set or reset the

distance for service type items. For scheduled

Instruments and controls 2-19

maintenance items and intervals, refer to your

“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.”

Tire

This indicator appears when the customer set

distance is reached for replacing tires. You can

set or reset the distance for replacing tires.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. For additional

information, refer to “Changing wheels

and tires” in the “Maintenance & Do- It-

Yourself” section of this manual. Many

factors including tire inflation, alignment,

driving habits and road conditions affect

tire wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement indi-

cator for a certain driving distance does

not mean your tires will last that long. Use

the tire replacement indicator as a guide

only and always perform regular tire

checks. Failure to perform regular tire

checks, including tire pressure checks

could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle

damage could occur and may lead to a

collision, which could result in serious

personal injury or death.

Other

This indicator appears when the customer set

distance is reached for checking or replacing

maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil

filter and tires. Other maintenance items can in-

clude such things as air filter or tire rotation. The

distance for checking or replacing the items can

be set or reset.

Alarms

This setting allows the customer to set alarms for

outside temperature and a timer alert.

1. Press the button.

2. Use the button until “Settings” is se-

lected, and press ENTER.

3. Select “Alarms” using the button and

press ENTER.

Outside Temperature

This setting allows the customer to

enable/disable the alert for low outside tempera-

ture in the vehicle information display.

1. Use the button to select “Outside

Temperature”.

2. Press the ENTER button to turn on/off the

outside temperature in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Timer Alert

This setting allows the driver to set an alert to

notify a set time has been reached.

1. Use the button to select “Timer Alert”.

2. Press the ENTER button.

3. To change the timer amount, use the

button and the ENTER button to save the

selected time amount.

Language

The language of the vehicle information display

can be changed to:

●US English

●French

●Spanish

Use the , , and the ENTER buttons to

select and change the language of the vehicle

information display. The language of the center

display/navigation can be changed indepen-

dently of the vehicle information display. For ve-

hicles not equipped with Navigation refer to “Lan-

guage / Units” and for vehicles equipped with

Navigation refer to, “How to use the setting but-

ton” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Units

The units that are shown in the vehicle informa-

tion display can be changed:

●Mileage

●Tire pressures

●Temperature

Use the , , and the ENTER buttons to

select and change the units of the vehicle infor-

mation display. The units of the center

display/navigation can be changed indepen-

dently of the vehicle information display. For ve-

hicles not equipped with Navigation refer to

“Language/Units” and for vehicles equipped with

Navigation refer to, “How to use the setting but-

ton” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

Mileage

The unit for the mileage that displays in the ve-

hicle information display can be changed to:

●miles, MPG, Inch

●km/h, l/100km, cm

●km/h, km/l, cm

Use the and the ENTER buttons to select

and change the unit.

Tire Pressures

The unit for tire pressure that displays in the

vehicle information display can be changed to:

●psi

●kPa

●bar

●Kgf/cm

Use the and the ENTER buttons to select

and change the unit.

Temperature

The temperature that displays in the vehicle infor-

mation display can be changed from:

●°F (Fahrenheit)

●°C (Celsius)

Use the ENTER button to toggle choices.

Welcome Effects

The welcome screen display can be turned

ON/OFF to display when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position. To

enable/disable the welcome screen:

1. Press the button.

2. Use the buttons to select “Settings”,

and press ENTER.

3. Select “Welcome Effects” using the

buttons and press ENTER to turn this func-

tion ON or OFF.

Factory Reset

The settings in the vehicle information display can

be reset back to the factory default. To reset the

vehicle information display:

1. Press the button.

2. Use the buttons to select “Settings”,

and press the ENTER button.

3. Select “Factory Reset” using the but-

tons and press the ENTER button.

4. Select “YES” to return all settings back to

default by pressing the ENTER button.

Instruments and controls 2-21

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. No Key Detected

2. Key ID Incorrect

3. Shift to Park

4. Push ignition to OFF

5. Key Battery Low

6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys-

tem

7. Release Parking brake

8. Low Fuel

9. Low Washer Fluid

10. Door Open

11. Liftgate Open

LIC2559

2-22 Instruments and controls

12. Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?

13. Low Outside Temperature

14. Power will turn off to save the battery

15. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

16. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

17. Low Oil Pressure

18. Key Registration Complete

19. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

20. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

21. Parking Sensor Error

22. Remote Start (if so equipped)

23. Loose Fuel Cap

24. I-Key System Error: See Owners Manual

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is

left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in

the ON or ACC position. Make sure the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle.

Key ID Incorrect

The warning appears when the ignition switch is

turned from the OFF position and the Intelligent

Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot

start the engine with an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intel-

ligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever

is in any position other than P (Park). Also, a

chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the

OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position or start the engine.

For additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intel-

ligent Key” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

Push ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illumi-

nates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition

switch is placed in the ACC position when the

shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition

switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK

position.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery

with a new one. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement”in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key

system

This indicator appears when the battery of the

Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key

system and the vehicle are not communicating

normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.

For additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intel-

ligent Key battery discharge” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of

the vehicle information display when the parking

brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the

fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

Instruments and controls 2-23

reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the windshield-

washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-

washer fluid as necessary. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Door/liftgate Open

This warning illuminates when a door has been

opened when the engine is running.

Liftgate Open

This warning illuminates when the liftgate has

been opened when the engine is running.

Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?

This indicator appears when the set time is

reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For

setting the timer, refer to “Timer alert” in this

section.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be

changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For

additional information, refer to “Temperature” in

this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This warning appears in message area of the

vehicle information display after a period of time if

the shift lever has not moved from the P (Park)

position.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a problem

with the CVT system. If this warning comes on,

have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning appears when the headlights are

left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.

Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO

position. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Low Oil Pressure

This warning appears in message area of the

vehicle information display if low oil pressure is

detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate

low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is

not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use

the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Key Registration Complete

This appears when a new Intelligent Key is regis-

tered to the vehicle.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire

pressure is detected. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of

all four tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label. For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an error with

your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Parking Sensor Error

This warning illuminates when there is an error

with the system.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Push to start

This warning appears in the vehicle information

display when the vehicle has been started using

the remote start function. To start the vehicle,

apply the brake and place the ignition switch in

the ON position.

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been

refueled. For additional information, refer to

“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Intelligent Key error

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of a

malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the

light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may

be impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

you can drive the vehicle. However in these

cases, contact an INFINITI retailer for repair as

soon as possible.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

●Vehicle security system

●INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the

doors, liftgate or hood when the system is armed.

It is not, however, a motion detection type system

that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in

the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when

unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and

park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. Your INFINITI retailer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows and the moonroof. The

system can be armed even if the win-

dows and moonroof are open.

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with the

Intelligent Key, door handle request switch

or power door lock switch.

Key fob operation:

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes

on. The indicator stays illuminated for

a period of time indicating that the system is

in the pre-armed phase.

LIC2226

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-25

The indicator light will blink every

3 seconds once the security system is

armed.

If during the pre-armed phase one of the

following occurs, the system will not arm:

●Any door is unlocked with the mechanical

key

●A door is opened with the release button

with the Intelligent Key on your person

●The doors are unlocked using the unlock

button on the Intelligent Key

●The ignition switch is placed in the ACC

or ON position

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate when all the doors, hood and

liftgate are locked with the ignition

switch placed in the LOCK position.

When placing the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position, the system will be

released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The turn signals blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-

riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if

the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm

can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door

or liftgate with the key, or by pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening the door or liftgate without using the

key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is

unlocked by releasing the door inside lock

switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s

door or the liftgate with the key, pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key, or press-

ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen-

ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the

door handle.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for ex-

ample, when interference is caused by another

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an au-

tomated toll road device or automatic payment

device on the key ring), restart the engine using

the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI rec-

ommends placing the registered INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to

avoid interference from other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

2-26 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the

ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC

position. This function indicates the INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see an INFINITI retailer

for service as soon as possible. Please

bring all INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have when visiting your

INFINITI retailer for service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the window and ob-

scure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the window with the de-

froster before you wash the window.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

with washer fluid concentrates at full

strength. Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the window washer reservoir.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir. Do

not use the window washer reservoir to

mix the washer fluid concentrate and

water.

LIC0474

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-27

If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by

snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect

its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to

the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that

is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately

1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the

wiper.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster). Also, the inter-

mittent operation speed varies in accor-

dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,

when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-

tent operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the driving

speed dependent intermittent wiper func-

tion. Refer to “Vehicle information display”

in this section of the manual.

For models with the rain-sensing auto wiper sys-

tem, refer to “Rain-sensing auto wiper system” in

this section.

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC3626

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2926

2-28 Instruments and controls

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep opera-

tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can auto-

matically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper

speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle

speed by using the rain sensor located on the

upper part of the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push

the lever down to the AUTO position 䊊

1. The

wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted

by turning the knob toward the front 䊊

2(High) or

toward the rear 䊊

3(Low).

– High — High sensitive operation

– Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off,

push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull

down the lever to the LO or HI position.

CAUTION

●Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is in the

AUTO position and the ignition switch is

in the ON position. The wipers may op-

erate unexpectedly and cause an injury

or a wiper damage.

●The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch

is left in the AUTO position, the wipers

may operate unexpectedly when dirt,

fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck

on or around the sensor. The wipers

may also operate when exhaust gas or

moisture affect the rain sensor.

●When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the

rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher

even though the amount of the rainfall

is small. Be sure to turn off the rain-

sensing auto wiper system when you

use a car wash.

LIC2901

Instruments and controls 2-29

●The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain

sensor even if it is raining.

●Using genuine wiper blades is recom-

mended for proper operation of the

rain-sensing auto wiper system. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Wind-

shield wiper blades” in “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” regarding wiper

blade replacement.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the window and ob-

scure your vision. Warm the rear window

with the defroster before you wash the

rear window.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir is empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the windshield-washer fluid reser-

voir. Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid

concentrate and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted

by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to

protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper

switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and

around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn

the switch ON again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when

the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the

switch clockwise from the OFF position to oper-

ate the wiper.

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

䊊

2Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-

tion

LIC2898

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

2-30 Instruments and controls

Push the switch forward 䊊

3to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors:

Start the engine and push the rear window de-

froster switch. The rear window defroster indica-

tor light on the display screen comes on. Push the

switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

●When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. Always have your xe-

non headlights replaced at an INFINITI

retailer.

●Xenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional head-

lights. If they are not correctly aimed,

they might temporarily blind an oncom-

ing driver or the driver ahead of you and

cause a serious accident. If headlights

are not aimed correctly, immediately

take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer

and have the headlights adjusted

correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its

brightness or color varies slightly. However, the

color and brightness will soon stabilize.

LIC2216

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-31

●The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off opera-

tion. It is generally desirable not to turn

off the headlights for short intervals

(for example, when the vehicle stops at

a traffic signal).

●If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start blink-

ing, or the color of the light will become

reddish. If one or more of the above

signs appear, contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights come on.

䊊

2When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the headlights come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

SIC3267

2-32 Instruments and controls

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to turn

on and off automatically. The autolight system

can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for a period of time after

you place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time

delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-

tion 䊊

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off and a

door is opened and left open, the headlights

remain on for a period of time. If another door is

opened while the headlights are on, then the

timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, ,or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor located in the top side

䊊

1of the instrument panel. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, your vehicle’s battery could be-

come discharged.

SIC3268 LIC2237

Instruments and controls 2-33

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward. The high beam lights come on

and the light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

The battery saver automatically turns off the igni-

tion after a period of time when the ignition switch

is left in the ACC or ON position.

Automatic headlight aiming control (if

so equipped)

Vehicles with xenon headlights are equipped with

an automatic levelling system. The headlight axis

is controlled automatically.

INFINITI recommends that you should consult the

local regulations on the use of lights.

For additional information, refer to “Xenon head-

lights” in this section.

Headlight aiming control

Depending on the number of occupants in the

vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight

axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is

traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may di-

rectly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead

or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The

light axis can be lowered with the operation of the

switch.

The larger the number designated on the switch,

the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat

road, select position 0.

SIC3269 LIC2230

2-34 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

climate controlled seats if you or the oc-

cupants cannot monitor seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

those body parts in contact with the seat.

Use of the climate controlled seats by

such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the cli-

mate controlled seat is operated with

the engine is not running.

●Do not use the climate controlled seat

for extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

climate controlled seat.

●Any liquid spilled on the climate con-

trolled seat should be removed immedi-

ately with a dry cloth.

●The climate controlled seat has an air

filter. Do not operate the climate con-

trolled seat without an air filter. This

may result in damage to the system.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not oper-

ate, turn the switch off and have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

The climate controlled seat warms up or cools

down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air

from the surface of the seat. The climate control

switch is located on the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be operated as

follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob 䊊

Ato the heat side 䊊

or the cool side 䊊

2. The indicator light 䊊

Bon

the control knob will illuminate.

3. Adjust the desired temperature using the

control knob 䊊

SIC4334

CLIMATE CONTROL SEAT SWITCH (if

so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or

cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn the control knob to the off (cen-

ter) position. The indicator light 䊊

Bon the

control knob goes off with the switch in the

off (center) position.

To check the air filter for the climate controlled

seat, contact an INFINITI retailer.

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below approximately 68°F

(20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel after the engine starts. The

indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the

steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),

then turn off automatically.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

The heated steering wheel switch is

equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the

switch has been activated for 30 minutes,

the system will automatically turn off. If the

surface temperature of the steering wheel

is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is

turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC2221

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-41

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper back-

ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to

do so before backing up. Always back up

slowly.

The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is active

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft

(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is

emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-

ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,

the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.

The system will automatically reset the next time

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Rear sonar

system (RSS) (if so equipped)” in the “Starting

and driving” section in this manual.

The Warning Systems switch is used to turn on

and off the warning systems (Forward Collision

Warning (FCW), Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) and Blind Spot Warning (BSW) systems)

that are activated using the settings menu on the

vehicle information display.

When the warning systems switch is turned off,

the indicator 䊊

1on the switch is off. The indicator

will also be off if all of the warning systems are

deactivated using the settings menu.

The FCW system will sound a warning chime and

the vehicle ahead detection indicator light blinks

to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to

the vehicle ahead. For additional information, re-

LIC0471 LIC2225

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

(if so equipped)

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-42 Instruments and controls

fer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The LDW system will sound a warning chime and

blink the LDW/LDP indicator light (orange) to

alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to

either the left or the right of a traveling lane with

detectable lane markers. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

system/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The BSW system will turn on the BSW/Blind

Spot Intervention® (BSI) indicator lights, located

next to the outside mirrors, if the radar sensors

detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn

signal is activated in the direction of the detected

vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the BSW/BSI

indicator light will flash. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

system/Blind Spot Intervention/® (BSI)

system/Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-

tem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

SIC4336

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-43

To use the outlets for devices that require 120v

power, place the ignition in the ON position and

push the power inverter switch.

The switch will illuminate when enabled.

CAUTION

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Do not attempt to use this while driving.

●Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory, doing so

could significantly drain the battery of

your vehicle.

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones. They

are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlets are powered only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

LIC2231

Instrument Panel

LIC2238

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

POWER OUTLETS

2-44 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. See your INFINITI re-

tailer for additional information.

●Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

●Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

Center Console

LIC2885

2nd Row

LIC2207

Cargo Area

LIC2236

Instruments and controls 2-45

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

120V OUTLET (if so equipped)

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Do not use accessories that exceed a

120V, 150W power draw. Do not use

double adaptors or more than one elec-

trical accessory.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

2nd Row

LIC2215

2-46 Instruments and controls

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS

There are two seatback pockets located on the

back of the driver and passenger seats. The

pockets can be used to store maps.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder 䊊

1, push and

release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to prevent an accident.

LIC2211 LIC2232 SIC4344

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-47

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS CAUTION

Do not recline the rear seatback when you

use the cup holders on the rear armrest.

Doing so may cause the beverages to spill

over, and if they are hot, they may scald

the passengers.

Front console

LIC2249

2nd row

LIC2212

2-48 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the

master key when locking 䊊

1or unlocking 䊊

2the

glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

Upper half

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the

upper half of the console box.

The upper half of the console box may be used for

storage of cellular phones. An access hole is

provided at the front of the upper half of the

console box for a phone or iPod® cord routing to

the power outlet.

Lower half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the

lower half of the console box. A power outlet is

located inside the console box and there is stor-

age for compact discs.

LIC2243 WIC1120 WIC1121

2-50 Instruments and controls

STORAGE TRAY

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to

help prevent injury in an accident or sud-

den stop.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

When securing items using luggage hooks lo-

cated on the back of the seat or side finisher do

not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs (29 N) to

a single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the floor

should have loads less than 110 lbs (490 N) to a

single hook.

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo

with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure

cargo.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LIC2214 LIC2208

Instruments and controls 2-51

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN

To access the floor storage area, push down 䊊

to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle to

lift the luggage board.

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are avail-

able through your INFINITI retailer. Contact an

INFINITI retailer for crossbar or other equipment

information.

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross

bars (if so equipped). Do not load more than

68 kg (150 lb) on the cross bars (if so equipped).

Observe the maximum load limit shown on the

cross bars (if so equipped) or roof carriers when

you attach them on the roof cross bars (if so

equipped). Contact an INFINITI retailer for cross

bar or other equipment information.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side

rails. Cross bars (if so equipped) must be in-

stalled before applying load/cargo/luggage to

the roof of the vehicle.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-

cated on the driver’s door pillar). For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle loading information”

in the “Technical and customer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

●Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

cross bars (if so equipped).

●Heavy loading of the cross bars (if so

equipped) has the potential to affect the

vehicle stability and handling during

sudden or unusual handling

maneuvers.

●Roof rack cross bars (if so equipped)

should be evenly distributed.

LIC2244 LIC2368

2-52 Instruments and controls

●Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross

bars (if so equipped) load.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

CAUTION

Always install the cross bars (if so

equipped) onto the roof side rails before

loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo

directly onto the roof side rails or the

vehicle’s roof may cause vehicle damage.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for a

period of time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of time, the

power to the windows is canceled.

1. Driver side automatic switch

2. Front passenger side automatic switch

3. Left rear passenger automatic switch

4. Right rear passenger automatic switch

5. Window lock button

SIC4352

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-53

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close the front and rear

passenger windows.

The window can be partially opened by pushing

the switch 䊊

Adown lightly until the desired win-

dow position is reached. To close the window

partially, pull the switch 䊊

Bup until the desired

window position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button 䊊

Cis depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function. Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window partially, push the switch down lightly

until the desired window position is reached. To

close the window partially, pull the switch up until

the desired window position is reached.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To partially

open the window, push the switch down lightly

until the desired window position is reached. To

partially close the window, pull the switch up

lightly until the desired window position is

reached.

SIC4353 LIC0410

2-54 Instruments and controls

Automatic operation (if so equipped)

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,

or jump started, the power window auto-reverse

function may not operate properly. If this occurs,

please contact an INFINITI retailer to re-initialize

the power window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The power

moonroof is operational for a period of time, even

if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF

position. If the driver’s door or the front passen-

ger’s door is opened during this period of time,

the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push the

switch to the open 䊊

2or close 䊊

1position and

release it; it need not be held. The roof will

LIC0410 SIC4355

MOONROOF

Instruments and controls 2-55

automatically open or close all the way. To stop

the roof, push the switch once more while it is

opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the

switch to the tilt up position 䊊

1and release it; it

need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push

the switch to the tilt down position 䊊

Restarting the moonroof switch

If the moonroof does not operate properly, per-

form the following procedure to initialize the

moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to

the close position 䊊

1to tilt the moonroof up.

2. Push and hold the switch to the close posi-

tion 䊊

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the switch to the open posi-

tion 䊊

2to fully tilt the moonroof down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates nor-

mally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after

performing the procedure above, have your ve-

hicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position or for a period of time

after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof

will immediately open backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-

mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens; the moonroof will fully close

gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the

moonroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

2-56 Instruments and controls

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-

ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair the

moonroof.

PANORAMIC SUNSHADE (if so

equipped)

The panoramic sunshade operates when the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position. The sunshade

switch is located near the roof console. When

opening or closing the sunshade the switch need

not be held.

To open the sunshade:

●To fully open the sunshade, push the switch

䊊

1toward the open position.

To close the sunshade:

●To fully close the sunshade, push the switch

䊊

2toward the close position.

WARNING

●To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from the

sunshade arm, the arm rail and sun-

shade inlet port.

●Do not allow children near the rear sun-

shade system. They could be injured.

●Do not place objects on or near the rear

sunshade. This could cause improper

operation or damage it.

●Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.

This could cause improper operation or

damage it.

CAUTION

●Do not place objects (such as newspa-

pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun-

shade inlet port. Doing so may entangle

these objects in the sunshade when it is

extending or retracting, causing im-

proper operation or damage to the

sunshade.

LIC2228

Instruments and controls 2-57

●Do not push the sunshade arm with

your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

●Do not put any object into the sunshade

inlet port as this may result in improper

operation or damage the sunshade.

●Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper operation

or damage the sunshade.

●Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Do-

ing so may elongate the sunshade. Im-

proper operation or damage to the sun-

shade may result. When the ON switch 䊊

1is pressed, the footwell

lights, step lights, map lights and rear personal

lights will automatically turn on and stay on for a

period of time when:

●The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent

Key, a key or the request switch while all

doors are closed and the ignition switch is in

the OFF position.

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●When individually pushed.

When the OFF switch 䊊

2is pushed, the interior

lights do not illuminate even when pushed.

NOTE:

The footwell lights and step lights illumi-

nate when the driver and passenger doors

are open regardless of the interior light

switch position. These lights will turn off

automatically after a period of time while

doors are open to prevent the battery from

becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

SIC4357

INTERIOR LIGHT

2-58 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light 䊊

1will turn on whenever the

parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted

with the illumination brightness control.

To turn on the personal lights, press and release

the switch 䊊

To turn the personal lights off, press and release

the switch 䊊

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To

turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

LIC2213 LIC1413 SIC4356

PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-59

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-

position switch. To operate, push the switch to

the desired position.

䊊

1ON: The light is illuminated.

䊊

2DOOR: The light illuminates when the lift-

gate is opened. The light turns off when the

liftgate is closed.

䊊

3OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless

of liftgate position or lock status.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides

a convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

●Will operate most Radio Frequency devices

such as garage doors, gates, home and of-

fice lighting, entry door locks and security

systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink® will retain all program-

ming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming proce-

dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLink®” in this section.

SIC2063A

CARGO LIGHT HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

WARNING

●Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-

rage door opener which cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing garage

door and then automatically stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

●During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to

the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery be

placed in the hand-held transmitter of the

device being programmed to HomeLink®

for quicker programming and accurate

transmission of the radio-frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-

ter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and

hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT re-

lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing indi-

cates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in

“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers” in this sec-

tion.

LIC2365

Instruments and controls 2-61

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indica-

tor light.

●If the indicator light 䊊

1is

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink® button is

pressed and released.

●If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly for

2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.

A second person may make the following

steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.

Do not stand on your vehicle to perform

the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door

opener motor in the garage, locate the

“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color

of the button may vary by manufacturer but it

is usually located near where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there

is difficulty locating the button, reference the

garage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” but-

ton.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and

hold the trained HomeLink® button for

2 seconds and release. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence up to three

times to complete the training process.

HomeLink® should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLink® but-

tons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-

ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several

seconds of transmission – which may not be long

enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal

during training. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties

training a gate operator or garage door opener

by using the “Training” procedures, replace

“Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the fol-

lowing:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”

process to prevent possible damage to the

garage door opener components.

For additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLink®” step 1 in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and the

hand-held transmitter button. During train-

ing, your hand-held transmitter may auto-

matically stop transmitting. Continue to

LIC2366

2-62 Instruments and controls

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®

at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515

(except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®

button that was just programmed. This procedure

will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

2-64 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

INFINITI Intelligent Key ..........................3-2

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys..........3-4

Doors ............................................3-5

Locking with key................................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch . . . ..........3-6

Automatic door locks ...........................3-6

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7

INFINITI Intelligent Key System ......................3-7

Operating range................................3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-10

INFINITI Intelligent Key Operation ...............3-10

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-13

Warning signals ...............................3-17

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-18

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...............3-20

Remote engine start operating range . . . .........3-20

Remote starting the vehicle .....................3-20

Extending engine run time ......................3-21

Canceling a remote start .......................3-21

Conditions the remote start will not work .........3-21

Hood ...........................................3-22

Liftgate..........................................3-23

Operating the power liftgate ....................3-23

Power liftgate main switch ......................3-26

Liftgate release lever ...........................3-26

Liftgate position setting ........................3-27

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-27

Opening the fuel-filler door .....................3-27

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-27

Steering wheel ...................................3-29

Tilt and telescopic operation ....................3-30

Sun visors .......................................3-31

Vanity mirrors .................................3-31

Mirrors ..........................................3-32

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror .............3-32

Outside mirrors ...............................3-32

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ..........3-34

Memory storage function .......................3-34

Entry/exit function .............................3-35

Setting memory function........................3-36

System operation..............................3-36

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, see an INFINITI retailer for duplicates

by using the key number. INFINITI does not re-

cord key numbers so it is very important to keep

track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all your keys. If you still have a key, your

INFINITI retailer can duplicate it.

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key system components and INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components. As many

as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and

used with one vehicle. The new keys must be

registered by an INFINITI retailer prior to use with

the Intelligent Key system and INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the

registration process requires erasing all memory

in the Intelligent Key components when register-

ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys

that you have to the INFINITI retailer.

Type A (if so equipped)

WPD0427

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2052

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code

of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

This may prevent the unauthorized use of

the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.

For information regarding the erasing

procedure, contact an INFINITI retailer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

driver’s door and glove box.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this

section and “Storage” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-

chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened

during valet hand-off, follow the procedure be-

low.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and

keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Storage” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove box

lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with

someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your retailer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as four INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used

with one vehicle. You should bring all INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to

your INFINITI retailer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase the

memory of all key codes previously registered

into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-

ter the registration process, these components

will only recognize keys coded into the INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to your retailer at the time

of registration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts,

this provides greater safety in the event

of an accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from the

vehicle. This also helps keep children

and others from unintentionally open-

ing the doors, and will help keep out

intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral 䊊

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again 䊊

4within 5 seconds un-

locks all doors.

Opening and closing windows

The driver’s door key operation allows you to

open and close windows equipped with auto-

matic operation at the same time.

●To open the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

●To close the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

NOTE:

When the window lock button is pressed

the key will not operate the window open or

close function.

Driver’s side

LPD0461

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position 䊊

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved to the

lock position and any door is open, all doors will

lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent

Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors

will unlock automatically and a chime will sound

after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-

nition is placed in the OFF position.

The automatic unlock function can be de-

activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-

vate the automatic door unlock system, perform

the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,

push and hold the power door lock switch to

the position (UNLOCK) for more than

5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard

indicator will flash once.

Inside lock

SPA2726 SPA2727

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-

tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock

the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the

power door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side).

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function can be

changed using the Vehicle Settings in the

vehicle information display. The “Auto

Door Unlock” choices are:

●Off

●IGN OFF

●Shift into P

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, the

door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and communi-

cation systems. Do not operate the In-

telligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored for a

flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote control function or

pushing the request switch on the vehicle without

taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The

operating environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

LPD2049

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-

ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.

Environmental conditions may interfere with the

operation of the Intelligent Key system under the

following operating conditions:

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi-

cator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Dis-

play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

Information Display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-

tery, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, contact an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, contact an INFINITI retailer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2054

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the

doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch within the range of opera-

tion.

WPD0375 LPD2057

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,

place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent

Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the outside buzzer sounds once.

NOTE:

●Request switches for all doors and lift-

gate can be deactivated when the I-Key

Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in

the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle in-

formation display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

●Doors lock with the door handle request

switch while the ignition switch is not in the

LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the me-

chanical key even if any door is open.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key inside

the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-

other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles or the rear liftgate

opener switch.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

LPD2058 LPD2059

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors

are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;

the lock will automatically unlock and the door

buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the

outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch again

within 1 minute to unlock all doors.

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Press the power liftgate request switch.

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and liftgate

can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock

setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle

Settings of the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the

doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning

the door handle to its original position will unlock

the door. If the door does not unlock after return-

ing the door handle, push the door handle re-

quest switch to unlock the door.

LPD2058 LPD2059

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pushing the request switch.

●Opening any door.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote control.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the doors or the rear liftgate are open

or not closed securely.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WPD0359

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec-

onds to unlock all doors.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed in

Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Set-

tings of the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pressing the button:

●Opening any doors.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by

performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

WPD0360

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously

open windows equipped with automatic opera-

tion.

●To open the windows, press the but-

ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than

3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

Linking the key fob to automatic drive

positioner memory (if so equipped)

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive

positioner, the key fob can be linked to a memory

setting.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

Releasing the rear liftgate

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by

performing the following:

●Press the button for longer than

0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.

●Press the button again for longer than

0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.

When the button is pressed during the

open or close process the liftgate will reverse.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a

period of time.

WPD0414 WPD0415

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for a period of time, or

●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

●The request switch on the driver or passen-

ger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is

in range of the door handle.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature can be

deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is

deactivated and the LOCK button is

pushed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.

When the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-

ther the hazard indicator lights nor the horn op-

erates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,

the vehicle information display screen will

show the current mode after the ignition

switch has been cycled from the OFF to the

ON position. The vehicle information dis-

play screen can also be used to change the

answer back horn mode. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Answer back horn” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to

confirm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WPD0362

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in

the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is

displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are

programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park)

position

The Push ignition to OFF warning appears

in the display.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out

of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting out of

the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears on

the display, the outside chime sounds three

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The Shift to Park warning appears on the

display and the outside chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position

and the shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position

and place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door with the inside lock

knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately

3 seconds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request

switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately

2 seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to start

the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears

on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. (For

additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.)

The No Key Detected warning appears on

the display, the outside chime sounds three

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for approximately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning light in

the meter illuminates in yellow.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent

Key system. Contact an INFINITI retailer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

The button will be on the INFINITI Intelli-

gent Key if the vehicle has remote engine start.

This feature allows the engine to start from out-

side the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the

remote start feature is used:

●Vehicles with an automatic climate control

system will default to either a heating or

cooling mode depending on the outside

temperature.

●Vehicles without automatic climate control

will default to the last used heating or cool-

ing mode.

●Vehicles equipped with heated seats may

have this feature come on during a remote

start. For additional information, refer to

“Heated front seats” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the

use of remote starters. For example, some laws

require a person using remote start to have the

vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of the

Remote Engine Start feature. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Conditions the remote start will

not work” in this section.

Other conditions can affect the performance of

the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional in-

formation, refer to “INFINITI Intelligent Key Sys-

tem” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

The remote engine start function can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-

fied operating range from the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The remote engine start operating range is ap-

proximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the remote start feature to start the engine

perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the LOCK button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

remote start button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle

is not within view press and hold the

remote start button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine

starts:

●The parking lights will turn on and remain on

as long as the engine is running.

●The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

LPD2272

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●The engine will continue to run for 10 min-

utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for

an additional ten minutes. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Extending engine run

time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then press the push-

button ignition switch to the ON position before

driving. For additional information, refer to “Driv-

ing the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote start feature can be extended one

time by performing the steps listed in “Remote

starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will

be calculated as follows:

●The first 10 minute run time will start when

the remote start function is performed.

●The second 10 minutes will start immedi-

ately when the remote start function is per-

formed again. For example, if the engine has

been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes

are added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

●Extending engine run time will bring you to

the 2 remote start limit.

A maximum of 2 remote starts, or a single start with

an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON

position and then back to the OFF position before

the remote start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE START

To cancel a remote start, perform one of the

following:

●Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press until the parking lights turn off.

●Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

●Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

●The extended engine run time has expired.

●The first 10 minute timer has expired.

●The engine hood has been opened.

●The shift lever is moved out of park.

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli-

gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is

not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START

WILL NOT WORK

The remote start will not operate if any of the

following conditions are present:

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

●The hood is not securely closed.

●The hazard warning lights are on.

●The engine is still running. The engine must

be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 sec-

onds if the engine goes from running to off.

This is not applicable when extending en-

gine run time.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held for at least 2 seconds.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

●The brake is pressed.

●The doors are not closed and locked.

●The trunk or back door is open.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

●The I–Key Indicator Light remains

solid in the vehicle information display.

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote

start with an extension, have already been

used.

●The vehicle is not in P (Park).

●There is a detected registered key already

inside of the vehicle.

●The Remote Start function has been

switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Set-

tings of the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The remote engine start may display a warning or

indicator in the vehicle information display. For

additional information and an explanation of the

warning or indicator, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

䊊

1Pull the hood lock release handle located

below the driver side instrument panel. The

hood will spring up slightly.

䊊

2Push the lever at the front of the hood to the

side as illustrated with your fingertips and

raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make

sure it locks into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

LPD2061

HOOD

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

●Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from open-

ing while driving.

●Do not drive with the liftgate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

●Always be sure that hands and feet are

clear of the door frame to avoid injury

while closing the liftgate.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the liftgate.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate,

the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the

power liftgate will not operate if battery

voltage is low.

Power Open:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the

fully closed position to the fully open position in

approximately 5 to 8 seconds. The power open

feature can be activated by the switch on the key

fob, the instrument panel switch and the liftgate

Instrument panel switch

LPD2212

Liftgate opener switch

LPD2069

LIFTGATE

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

open switch. The hazard lights flash and a chime

sounds to indicate the power open sequence has

been started.

●When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can

be opened by the instrument panel switch,

key fob and liftgate open switch 䊊

A(with the

key fob in liftgate range). The liftgate will

individually unlock and open. Once the lift-

gate is closed, the vehicle will remain in the

unlock status.

●The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-

ond before the liftgate opens.

●The liftgate must be unlocked to open it with

the liftgate opener switch 䊊

Aand without the

key fob in liftgate range.

●The switch on the liftgate 䊊

Acan only be

used to open the liftgate if the MAIN switch

(located in the Instrument panel) is in the ON

position.

A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is

moved out of P (Park) during a power open

operation.

Power Close:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the

fully open position to the secondary position.

When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi-

tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the

liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close

takes approximately 7 to 10 seconds. The power

close feature can be activated by the switch on

the key fob, the instrument panel and the liftgate

close switch 䊊

B. The hazard lights flash and a

chime sounds to indicate the power close se-

quence has been started.

●If the liftgate opener switch 䊊

Ais activated

while the cinching motor is engaged, the

cinching motor will disengage and release

the latch.

●The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-

ond before the liftgate closes.

●The switch on the liftgate 䊊

Bcan only be

used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate

main switch is in the ON position.

Reverse:

The power liftgate will reverse direction immedi-

ately during power open or power close 䊊

Bif the

key fob, instrument panel or liftgate switch is

pushed. A chime will sound to announce the

reversal.

Auto Reverse:

If an obstacle is detected during power open or

power close, a warning chime will sound and the

liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full

open or full close position. If a second obstacle is

detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the

liftgate will enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the

liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip

during power close, the liftgate will reverse direc-

tion and return to the full open position.

Liftgate switch

LPD2275

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,

the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

Manual Mode:

If power operation is not available, the liftgate

may be operated manually. Power operation may

not be available if the power liftgate main switch

is in the ON position, if multiple obstacles have

been detected in a single power cycle, or if

battery voltage is low.

If the power liftgate opener switch 䊊

Ais pushed

during power open or close, the power operation

will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated

manually.

To open the liftgate manually, press the liftgate

opener switch 䊊

Aand lift the liftgate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-

curely.

LPD2062

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height

(Garage mode) by performing the following:

1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or

the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the liftgate down and move to the de-

sired height position (the liftgate will have

some resistance when being manually ad-

justed).

3. Press and hold the power liftgate switch 䊊

located on the liftgate for more than 3 sec-

onds or until 2 beeps are heard.

The liftgate will open to the selected position

setting. To change the position of the liftgate,

repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of the

liftgate.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks when

the driver’s door is unlocked.

1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of the

following operations:

●Unlock the driver’s door with the key fob.

●Unlock the driver’s door with the key.

●Push the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

●Push the door handle request switch.

2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the right

side of the fuel-filler door to release.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and

lock the doors.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

WPD0454

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, re-

fer to “Fuel Recommendation” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving trips

for the message to be displayed. Failure

to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-

pears may cause the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the light illuminates because

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

tighten or install the cap and continue

to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips.

If the light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected by an INFINITI retailer.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section

in this manual.

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LPD2065

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the

vehicle information display when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has

been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for

the message to be displayed. To turn off the

warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the next button 䊊

Aon the steer-

ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 䊊

Bafter tight-

ening the fuel-filler cap.

WARNING

●Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

●Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

air bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use the

seat belts.

LPD2066

STEERING WHEEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION

To adjust the steering wheel move the switch 䊊

in the following directions:

●Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired tilt position.

●Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-

ward in direction 䊊

3to the desired tele-

scopic position.

CAUTION

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-

scoping functions of the steering wheel,

after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-

charged, may prevent the steering wheel

position from being adjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both

the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be

reset after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-

charged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic

operation from locking in one position. When the

battery has been recharged or replaced, perform

the following:

●For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊

1so

the steering wheel moves to the highest

position 䊊

2that can be reached.

●For telescopic operation: Adjust the switch

䊊

1so the steering wheel moves to the most

forward and backward position 䊊

3that can

be reached.

Performing these operations resets the range of

the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system will make

the steering wheel move up automatically when

the driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver

get into and out of the seat more easily. The

steering wheel moves back into position when

the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch

is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

WPD0366

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

䊊

1To block glare from the front, swing down the

sun visor.

䊊

2To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing the

visor to the side.

䊊

3Slide the extension sun visor in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

ibly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity

mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is

open.

WPD0315

LPD2067

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims according to the intensity of the head-

lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic

anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the | button again. The indicator light will turn

on.

For information on HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver operation, refer to “HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensors, resulting in improper operation.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the left or right

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch 䊊

LPD0469 LPD2269

MIRRORS

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Power folding outside mirrors

CAUTION

●Do not touch the mirrors while they are

moving. Your hand may be pinched, and

the mirror may malfunction.

●Do not drive with the mirrors stored.

You will be unable to see behind the

vehicle.

Push the 䊊

2switch to open or the 䊊

1switch to

close the mirrors.

If one of the mirrors are manually operated or

bumped, the mirror body can become loose at

the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror op-

eration, cycle the mirrors by pushing the 䊊

switch until completely closed, then push the 䊊

switch until the mirrors are in the open position.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both out-

side mirror surfaces downward to provide better

rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror

control switch is in either the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically return to their original

position when you shift out of R (Reverse).

The outside mirror surfaces will return to their

original position when one of the following con-

ditions has occurred:

●The shift lever is moved to any position other

than R (Reverse).

●The outside mirror control switch is set to the

neutral or center position.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

SPA2738

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in the

Center position, the mirror surface will NOT

turn downward when the shift lever is

moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

Heated mirrors

The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Rear window and

outside mirror defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

●Memory storage function

●Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col-

umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the

automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these

procedures to use the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position

(the vehicle should be stopped while setting

the memory).

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,

and outside mirrors to the desired positions

by manually operating each adjusting

switch. For additional information, refer to

“Seats”in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

LPD2068

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

this manual, and “Tilt/Telescopic Steering”

and “Outside mirrors” in this section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON and stay ON for ap-

proximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory has been

stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous memory

position will be overwritten by the new

stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch.

●If a memory position has not been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the

respective switch will come ON for approxi-

mately 0.5 seconds.

●If a memory position has been stored in the

switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the

respective switch will stay ON for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored memory

position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory Storage

Function” section for storing the memory

position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON. While the indicator

light is ON for 5 seconds, press the

button on the key fob. The indicator light of

the linked memory switch will blink. After the

indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked

to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position, pressing the button on

the key fob will move the driver’s seat, steering

wheel and outside mirrors to the linked memory

switch position.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob will

link the NEW position and overwrites the

previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and automatic operation steering column will au-

tomatically move when the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position. This allows the driver to get into

and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering column will move up:

●When the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch placed in the OFF position.

●When the ignition switch is turned from

ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to

the previous position:

●When the ignition switch is turned into ACC

or ON while the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-

celed through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle

information display by performing the following:

●Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

●Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to

OFF.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the stored memory positions will be lost

and some of the functions will be restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The position of the following settings can be

linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized

settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.

●Climate control system

●Navigation system (if so equipped)

●Audio system

To use the memory function, set the climate,

navigation and audio systems to the driver’s pre-

ferred settings. Lock the doors with the Intelligent

Key. Each Intelligent Key may be set with the

driver’s individual preferences. When a new In-

telligent Key is used, “Connection with the key

has been done” will be displayed on the screen

and the memorized settings are available.

To engage the memorized settings, perform the

following:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to the

memorized settings.

2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driver’s

door handle request switch or the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key.

3. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion. The settings linked to the Intelligent Key

will start.

For additional information, refer to “Heater and air

conditioner (automatic)” in the “Monitor, climate,

audio, phone and voice recognition systems”

section of this manual.

For additional information on using the Naviga-

tion System, refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

For additional information on using the Audio

system, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recognition sys-

tems” section of this manual.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH

(7 km/h).

●When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive positioner

is operating.

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat is turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

●When the seat has already been moved to

the memorized position.

●When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

●When the shift lever is moved from P (Park)

to any other position.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-4

How to use the INFINITI controller ................4-5

How to select menus on the screen ..............4-6

How to use the STATUS button ..................4-6

How to use the INFO button .....................4-6

How to use the SETTING button .................4-8

OFF button ..............................4-9

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) .................4-10

How to use the INFINITI controller ...............4-11

How to use the touch-screen . . .................4-11

Menu options .................................4-13

How to select menus on the screen .............4-14

How to use the STATUS button .................4-14

How to use the INFO button ....................4-14

How to use the SETTING button ................4-16

OFF button .............................4-18

Image viewer (if so equipped) ......................4-19

Using the image viewer ........................4-19

RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-21

How to read the displayed lines .................4-21

How to park with predicted course lines..........4-22

Difference between predictive and actual

distances .....................................4-23

How to adjust the screen .......................4-26

Operating tips.................................4-26

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .............4-27

Available views ................................4-28

Difference between predictive and actual

distances .....................................4-32

How to switch the display ......................4-35

Parking Sensor (if so equipped) Rear Center

Sonar (if so equipped) .........................4-35

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ................4-37

How to adjust the screen view ..................4-40

Around View® Monitor settings .................4-41

View malfunction ..............................4-42

Operating tips.................................4-43

Vents ...........................................4-44

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ..............4-45

Automatic operation ...........................4-46

Manual operation ..............................4-46

Operating tips.................................4-47

CLIMATE setting screen........................4-48

Rear automatic air conditioning system...........4-50

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-53

Audio system ....................................4-53

Radio ........................................4-53

FM radio reception ............................4-53

AM radio reception ............................4-54

Satellite radio reception ........................4-54

Audio operation precautions ....................4-54

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player ........................................4-68

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player

Operation (models with Navigation System) ......4-76

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models without Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-80

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-81

iPod®* player operation without Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-85

iPod®* player operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-87

Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so equipped) .....4-91

CD care and cleaning ..........................4-94

Steering wheel switch for audio control ..........4-95

Antenna ......................................4-97

Dual head restraint/headrest DVD system

(if so equipped) ..................................4-97

System components ...........................4-97

Before operating dual head restraint/

headrest DVD system .........................4-102

Playing a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) ...........4-103

Operating tips................................4-108

Care and maintenance ........................4-108

Car phone or CB radio ...........................4-109

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-109

Regulatory Information ........................4-111

Using the system .............................4-111

Control buttons ..............................4-113

Getting started ...............................4-114

List of voice commands .......................4-115

Voice Adaptation (VA) mode ...................4-120

Manual control . . .............................4-121

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-121

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-123

Regulatory Information ........................4-124

Voice commands .............................4-125

Connecting procedure ........................4-125

Vehicle Phonebook ...........................4-127

Handset phonebook ..........................4-129

Making a call.................................4-130

Receiving a call ..............................4-131

During a call .................................4-132

Ending a call .................................4-132

Phone settings ...............................4-133

Bluetooth® settings ..........................4-134

Call volume . . ................................4-135

INFINITI Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) .................................4-136

INFINITI Voice Recognition Standard Mode......4-136

Using the system .............................4-139

Before starting . . .............................4-139

Giving voice commands .......................4-139

INFINITI Voice Recognition Alternate

Command Mode .............................4-144

Using the system .............................4-149

Speaker Adaptation function...................4-151

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-152

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from it,

stop using the system immediately and

contact your nearest INFINITI retailer.

Ignoring such conditions may lead to

accidents, fire or electrical shock.

1. INFO button (P. 4-6)

2. STATUS button (P. 4-6)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-5)

4. DISP (display) button

5. + (brightness control) button

6. – (brightness control) button

7. OFF brightness control button

(P. 4-9)

8. BACK (previous) button

LHA2110

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR

SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. ENTER button

10. SETTING button (P. 4-8)

11. ECON (fuel economy) button

CAUTION

●The glass display screen may break if it

is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the control

panel.

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown on the display. These keys can only be

selected using the INFINITI controller.

HOW TO USE THE INFINITI

CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display by rotating or

pushing the center dial 䊊

2upward or downward.

Press the ENTER button 䊊

1to select an item.

If you press either of the BACK buttons 䊊

before the operation is completed, the operation

will be canceled and/or the display will return to

the previous screen.

After the operation is complete, press either of

the BACK buttons 䊊

3to return to the

previous screen.

SAA2956

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-

play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-

tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different

areas on the screen provide you with important

information. See the following for details:

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen (for example, press the SETTING

button > then select the “Clock” key, then

select the “Time Zone” key).

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen (for example, Pacific time zone,

Mountain time zone, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller may be

used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and

select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections avail-

able for that screen (for example, 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted (for example, manually set the time

zone).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS

BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climate control

system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS

button.

The following information will appear when the

STATUS button is pressed multiple times:

Audio →Audio and climate control system →

Audio and fuel consumption →Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON

Press the INFO button. This screen sets or dis-

plays various information that is helpful for using

the vehicle. Available items include fuel economy

and maintenance information.

LHA1300 WHA1149

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result

Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy menu.

Distance to Empty (DTE) Displays an estimation of the distance that the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly calculated based on the

amount of fuel in the fuel tank and actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the DTE

display will change to (*).

NOTE: If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may

continue to be displayed.

NOTE: When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Average Fuel Economy Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset. The display is updated every 30 seconds and 500 m (1/3 mi). After a reset or

connecting the battery cables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting Fuel Economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the “Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Re-

set” key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button.

Fuel Economy Record Select the “View” key to display the average fuel consumption history in a graph form.

Maintenance Displays maintenance reminders.

Reminder keys (1–4) Select a key to display that maintenance interval.

Reset Distance

key

Resets the distance for the selected reminder to 0 mi (km).

Interval key Displays the interval for the selected reminder. Select the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the distance up or down.

Interval Re-

minder key

Displays status of the selected interval reminder. Select to toggle on or off. If set to “On”, the maintenance notice screen will be displayed

once the interval is met and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF and then ON position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

HOW TO USE THE SETTING

BUTTON

Press the SETTING button. This screen displays

and adjusts various settings and functions that

are available for your vehicle. Use the INFINITI

controller to select an item and then press the

ENTER button. When the amber indicator next to

an item is illuminated, the feature is enabled.

Menu Item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Display Adjusts the settings for the display screen.

Brightness/Contrast Adjusts the brightness or contrast of the map background.

Display off Toggles the display screen on and off. The amber indicator is illuminated when the display is set to “On”. When the display is set to “Off” and a

control panel, audio or heater and air conditioner button is pressed, the display will resume until that operation is finished. To turn the display

back on, press and hold the OFF button for approximately 2 seconds or return to the display setting screen and adjust the setting.

Background Color Adjusts the display screen between day and night mode.

Switch Beeps Toggles on and off the beep sound that is heard when a control panel button is pressed.

Camera Toggles the predictive course lines on or off when the rear view camera is displayed on screen. For additional information, refer to “RearView

Monitor” in this section.

Clock Adjusts the clock settings.

LHA1304

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result

On-screen Clock Toggles on or off the clock in the upper right corner of the display.

Clock Format Toggles between a 12–hour and 24–hour clock.

Daylight Savings Time Toggles on or off the daylight savings time.

Time Zone Adjusts the time zone. Choose a time zone from the available list.

Adjust Clock Manually adjusts the hours and minutes of the clock.

Language/Units Select which settings you want to change using the INFINITI controller.

Select Language Select to change language that will be shown on the display.

Select Units Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units shown on the display.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the OFF button. Pressing the button again

will change the display to the day or the

night display. The brightness can then be

adjusted using the INFINITI controller.

The display brightness can also be adjusted us-

ing the + (brighter) button or the ⫺(dimmer)

button.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the

button again to turn the display on.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

1. CAMERA button

2. DEST (destination) button*

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-11)

4. INFO button (P. 4-14)

5. SETTING button (P. 4-16)

6. OFF brightness control button

(P. 4-18)

7. STATUS button (P. 4-14)

8. VOICE button*

9. ENTER button

10. BACK (previous) button

11. MAP button*

12. ROUTE button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the control

panel.

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can be

selected by touching the screen or using the

INFINITI controller.

LHA2111

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO USE THE INFINITI

CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display by rotating or

pushing the center dial 䊊

2upward or downward.

Press the ENTER button 䊊

1to select an item.

If you press either of the BACK buttons 䊊

before the operation is completed, the operation

will be canceled and/or the display will return to

the previous screen.

After the operation is complete, press either of

the BACK buttons 䊊

3to return to the

previous screen.

For the VOICE button 䊊

4functions, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-

SCREEN

CAUTION

●The glass display screen may break if it

is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-

not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-

ate the navigation system.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause

an accident.

SAA2955

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Touch-screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those

for the INFINITI controller are possible using the

touch-screen operation.

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Navigation” key, touch the “Navigation” key䊊

1on the screen. Touch the “BACK” key䊊

to return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time

or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time or

touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

Uppercase Shows uppercase characters.

Lowercase Shows lowercase characters.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

OK Completes the character input.

LHA1227

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-

tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the

screen.

MENU OPTIONS

The start menu can be displayed using the menu

control switch on the steering wheel controls.

1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is dis-

played, press and hold the menu control

switch until the “Menu Options” screen ap-

pears.

2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the

menu control switch up or down. Press the

menu control switch to select the high-

lighted item.

Available items

Destination/Route

These items are for the navigation system. For

additional information, refer to the separate Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

Info

Displays the information screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you press the INFO

button.

Settings

Displays the settings screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you press the SET-

TING button.

SAA2476

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-

play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-

tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different

areas on the screen provide you with important

information. See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen (for example, press the SETTING

button > then select the “Audio” key).

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).

3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller may be

used to move up or down on the screen and

select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections avail-

able for the current menu, even if they are on

multiple pages (for example, 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted (for example, Adjust bass).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS

BUTTON

The STATUS button is used to display system

information. Three different split screens of infor-

mation are available. Press the STATUS button

multiple times to cycle through these screens as

follows:

Audio with Turn Information for Navigation →

Audio with Fuel Economy Information →Audio

with Climate Control Information →Audio with

Turn Information for Navigation

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON

Press the INFO button. This screen sets or dis-

plays various information that is helpful for using

the vehicle. Available items include fuel economy,

maintenance, navigation and voice recognition

information.

LHA2178 LHA2172

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result

Infiniti Connection For additional information on the Infiniti Connection system, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy menu.

Distance to Empty (DTE) Displays an estimation of the distance that the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly calculated based on the

amount of fuel in the fuel tank and actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the DTE

display will change to (*).

NOTE: If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may

continue to be displayed.

NOTE:When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Average Fuel Economy Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset. The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi (500 m). After a reset or

connecting the battery cables, the display might show (**.*). Select “Reset Fuel Eco” to reset the fuel economy calculation to 0.

Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the “Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset

Fuel Eco” key using the INFINITI controller.

Fuel Economy Record Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Fuel Eco History” key using the INFINITI controller. The aver-

age fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Traffic Info For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Weather Info For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Where am I? For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Maintenance Displays maintenance reminders.

Reminder keys Select a key to display the maintenance interval for engine oil, oil filter, tire or other reminder.

Reset Distance Resets the distance for the selected reminder to 0 mi (km).

Interval Displays the interval for the selected reminder. Select the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the distance up or down.

Interval Re-

minder

Displays status of the selected interval reminder. Select to toggle on or off. If set to “On”, the maintenance notice screen will be displayed

once the interval is met and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF and then ON position.

Map Update For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Others Displays a list of further options.

Map Update For additional information regarding Map Updates, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s manual.

Navigation Version For additional information regarding Navigation Version, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s manual.

GPS Position For additional information regarding GPS Position, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s manual.

Voice Recognition For additional information on Voice Recognition settings, refer to “INFINITI Voice Recognition system” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

HOW TO USE THE SETTING

BUTTON

Press the SETTING button. This screen displays

and adjusts various settings and functions that

are available for your vehicle. When the amber

indicator next to an item is illuminated, the feature

is enabled.

Menu Item Result

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System”.

Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System”.

Volume & Beeps Adjusts the volume and beep settings.

Navigation volume For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Phone Volume For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

Infiniti Connection Volume For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Switch Beeps Toggles ON or OFF the beep sound that is heard when a control panel button is pressed.

Display Adjusts the settings for the display screen.

Rear display (if so equipped) Adjusts the settings for the rear display screens.

LHA2152

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result

Display Control Select the “ON” key for either the left or right display to alternately enable or disable the display fo the left or right rear passengers. If the display

is enabled, select the key (DVD, USB, front AUX or rear AUX) that you wish to have displayed on the corresponding screen. The front AUX set-

ting is for devices plugged into the AUX jacks in the center console. The rear AUX setting is for the devices plugged into the AUX jacks on the

back of the center console.

Auto Display Toggles ON or OFF the Auto Display option. When Auto Display is ON, the rear displays will automatically turn on when a movie is played from a

DVD or USB device.

Rear Speaker Toggles ON or OFF the Rear Speaker volume.

ECO DRIVE (if so equipped) To adjust the ECO pedal driver’s assist, select the “Standard”, “Soft” or “OFF” key and adjust it with the INFINITI controller. For additional infor-

mation about ECO DRIVE system, refer to “ECO pedal system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Others Select the “Others” key using the INFINITI controller. The voice recognition, language and units setting screen will be displayed.

Clock Press the SETTING button, the select the “Clock” key using the INFINITI controller to adjust the clock settings.

On-screen Clock When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. This clock will indicate

the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Clock Format

(24h)

When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), the clock format will change from the default 12–hour display to a 24–hour display.

Offset (hour) Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the hours.

Offset (minute) Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the minutes.

Daylight Savings

Time

When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the

amber indicator light will go out.

Time Zone Adjust the time zone. Choose a time from the available list on the display.

Display Adjustment To adjust the display settings, select the “Display Adjustment” key. The following settings are available:

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Menu Item Result

Brightness/

Contrast

Adjusts the brightness or contrast of the map background.

Display off Toggles the display screen on and off. The amber indicator is illuminated when the display is set to “On”. When the display is set to “Off” and a

control panel, audio or heater and air conditioner button is pressed, the display will resume until that operation is finished. To turn the display back

on, press and hold the OFF button for approximately 2 seconds or return to the display setting screen and adjust the setting.

Background

Color

Adjusts the display screen between day and night mode.

Color Theme Changes the color of the background, arrows and bars on the screen. Choose between “Black”, “Brown”, or “Silver”.

Language/Units Select which settings you want to change using the INFINITI controller.

Select Language Select to change language that will be shown on the display.

Select Units Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units shown on the display.

Voice Recognition For additional information on Voice Recognition settings, refer to “INFINITI Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Camera Settings Select the “Camera” key. The Camera Settings screen will appear. When this option is on (indicator light illuminated), the predictive course lines

will be displayed when the RearView Monitor is displayed on the screen. For additional information, refer to “RearView Monitor” in this section.

Image Viewer For additional information about these settings, refer to “Image Viewer” in this section.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the OFF button. Pressing the button again

will change the display to the day or the

night display. The brightness can then be

adjusted using the INFINITI controller.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the

button again to turn the display on.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USING THE IMAGE VIEWER

When a compatible portable storage device is

plugged into the USB connection port located in

the center console, compatible image files stored

on the device can be viewed on the control panel

display.

Connecting the portable storage

device

To connect a portable storage device to the sys-

tem so that images stored on it can be viewed,

insert the device into the USB connection port

located in the center console.

Viewing images

To view an image, press the SETTING button and

then select the “Image Viewer” key with the

INFINITI controller. The Image Viewer screen will

be displayed.

A list of compatible images on the storage device

is displayed on the left side of the screen, while

the selected image is displayed on the right side

of the screen. To choose a different picture from

the list, use the INFINITI controller to scroll

through the list once the desired image is high-

lighted.

Select the “Full Screen Display” key and press

the ENTER button to view a full screen version of

the image.

Image requirements:

●Image type: JPEG

●File extensions: *.jpg, *.jpeg

●Maximum resolution: 2048 x 1536

●Maximum size: 2 MB

●Colors: 32,768 (15-bit)

●Maximum file name length: 253 bytes (dis-

play only shows first 8 characters)

●Maximum folders: 500

●Maximum images per folder: 1,024

LHA1309

IMAGE VIEWER (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Viewing images in a slideshow

To view all of the images on the device in a slide-

show, first enter the full screen mode while viewing

one of the images. The slideshow control buttons

are located on the right side of the screen.

Select the play key to begin the slideshow.

The images shown on the screen will periodically

change at a given interval of time. To skip through

the images without waiting for them to change

automatically, select the key to skip back-

ward or the key to skip forward. Select the

stop key to end the slideshow and return

to the full screen display of the image currently on

the screen.

Slideshow settings

While in slideshow mode, the following settings

can be accessed:

Settings

Slideshow Speed Changes the frequency at which images are changed during a slideshow. Choose one of the options on the screen or “No Auto Change” to

have the images not change automatically.

Slideshow Order

Random Changes images in a random order when selected.

Order List Changes images in the order in which they are saved on the USB device.

LHA1310

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Re-

verse) position, the monitor display shows a rear-

ward view from the vehicle.

WARNING

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in situations such as slot parking

or parallel parking.

●The RearView Monitor is a convenience

but not a substitute for proper backing

procedures. Always turn to check what

is behind you before backing up.

●The RearView Monitor cannot com-

pletely eliminate blind spots or warn of

moving objects.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

●Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation.

●Do not put anything on the rear view

camera. The rear view camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

●Objects in the rearview will appear visu-

ally opposite than when viewed in the

rearview and outside mirrors.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

●Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

LHA1196

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when backing up.

The predicted course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the shift selector is in the R

(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move de-

pending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the steer-

ing wheel is in the neutral position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the

predicted course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

WARNING

●Always turn and check that it is safe to

do so before backing up. Always back

up slowly.

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line and predicted course lines

should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level paved

surface. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and may

be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

●When backing up the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are fur-

ther than they appear. When backing up

the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed

in the monitor are closer than they ap-

pear. Use the inside mirror or glance

over your shoulder to properly judge

distances to other objects.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

LHA1197

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is moved

to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines 䊊

Benter the parking space 䊊

4. When the back of the vehicle enters the

parking space 䊊

C, maneuver the steering

wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Dparallel to the parking spaces 䊊

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed objects.

LHA1198

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

LHA3145 LHA3146

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the position

䊊

in the display. However, the position

䊊

actually at the same distance as the position

䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

LHA1201 LHA3147

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

the position

䊊

if the object projects over the actual

backing up course.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor, press the SETTING button with the

RearView Monitor on and select the “Display”

key. Select one of the items and change the value

by touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the

INFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con-

trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor

while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-

ing brake is firmly applied.

OPERATING TIPS

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration. To clean the camera,

wipe with a cloth dampened with di-

luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

●When the shift lever is shifted to the R (Re-

verse) position, the display screen automati-

cally changes to the RearView Monitor

mode. However, the radio can be heard.

●When the view is switched, the display im-

ages on the screen may be displayed in

some delay.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light is directly coming on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly. This is not a malfunction.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects. This is not a malfunction.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark environment. This is not a malfunction.

●If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam-

era, the RearView Monitor may not display

objects clearly. Clean the camera.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a mild detergent diluted with

water.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor. The monitor displays various

views of the position of the vehicle.

Available views:

●Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding view of the vehicle from

above.

●Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

●Front View

An approximately 150-degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

●Front-Wide View

An approximately 180-degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

●Rearview

An approximately 150-degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

●Rear-Wide View

An approximately 180-degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or rear view

display, an object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed 䊊

1. When in the

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊

3of

the camera viewing areas will not appear in the

monitor 䊊

WARNING

●The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature. It is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation because it has

areas where objects cannot be viewed.

Always look out the windows and check

to be sure that it is safe to move.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

●Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirror in the stored

position, and make sure that the liftgate

is securely closed when operating the

vehicle using the Around View®

Monitor.

●The distance between objects viewed

on the Around View® Monitor differs

from the actual distance.

●The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the

rear license plate. Do not put anything

on the cameras.

LHA2776

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

AVAILABLE VIEWS

WARNING

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a paved,

level surface. The distance viewed on

the monitor may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle and

displayed objects.

●The distance between objects viewed in

the rearview differs from the actual dis-

tance because a wide-angle lens is

used.

●Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected

by the number of occupants, fuel level,

vehicle position, road condition and

road grade.

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predictive course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

●Objects in the monitor will appear visu-

ally opposite than when viewed in the

rearview and outside mirrors.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predictive course lines and the actual

course line.

●The displayed lines on the rearview will

appear slightly off to the right because

the rearview camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

●The vehicle width and predictive course

lines are wider than the actual width

and course.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front and rearview

Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width

and distance to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

A, are displayed on the moni-

tor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

●Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predictive course lines 䊊

Indicate the predictive course when operating

the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the steering

wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will

move depending on how much the steering

wheel is turned and will not be displayed while

the steering wheel is in the straight ahead posi-

tion.

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the neutral position,

both the right and left predictive course

lines 䊊

6are displayed. When the steering

wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a

line is displayed only on the opposite side

of the turn.

Front view

SAA1840

Rearview

SAA1896

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po-

sition and the predicted course to a parking

space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the size of the vehicle icon on

the bird’s-eye view may differ somewhat from the

actual vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊

2are

indicated in black.

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in yellow

for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is

displayed. It will be shown only the first time after

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to

an object, the corner sonar indicators 䊊

3appear.

When the center of the vehicle moves close to an

object, the center sonar indicator 䊊

4appears (if

so equipped).

The driver can check the direction and angle of

the tire on the display by tire icon 䊊

5when driving

the vehicle forward or backward.

Predictive course lines (䊊

6and 䊊

7) indicate the

predictive course when operating the vehicle.

The predictive course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the steering wheel is turned.

The predictive course lines will move depending

on how much the steering wheel is turned and

will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in

the neutral position.

When the monitor displays the front view and the

steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less

from the neutral position, the two green predic-

tive course lines 䊊

6are shown in front of the

vehicle.

When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees

or more, one green predictive course lines is

shown in front of the vehicle and other green

predictive course lines 䊊

7is shown at side of the

vehicle.

When the monitor displays the rear view, the

predictive course lines are shown at back of the

vehicle.

WARNING

●Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance

because the bird’s-eye view is a pseudo

view that is processed by combining the

views from the cameras on the outside

mirrors, the front and the rear of the

vehicle.

●Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

●Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

●The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

●A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the

seam of the views. The misalignment

will increase as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

●Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

LHA2213

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front

end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the vehicle

width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and side

䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted line.

The corner sonar indicator 䊊

4will appear when a

corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object.

The corner sonar indicator 䊊

4can be turned off.

For additional information, refer to “Around

View® Monitor” in this section.

CAUTION

The turn signal light may look like the

side-of-vehicle line. This is not a

malfunction.

Front-wide and rear-wide view

The front-wide and rear-wide view shows a wider

area on the entire screen and allows the checking

of the blind corners on right and left sides. The

rear-wide view displays an approximately 180-

degree area while the front-view and rearview

display an approximately 150-degree area. The

predictive course lines are not displayed when

using the front-wide and rear-wide view.

SAA1842

Front-wide view

LHA2318

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Distance guide lines:

Indicates distances from the vehicle body:

●Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

The corner sonar indicator 䊊

6will appear when a

corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 1.0 m (3 ft) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 1.0 m (3 ft) distance on

Rear-wide view

SAA2629

LHA3145

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA3146

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

LHA1201 LHA3147

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around View

Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor can display two split

view as well as a single view of the front-wide

view or rear-wide view. Select the “Change View”

key to switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is not in the R (Reverse) position,

the available views are:

●Front-view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Front-view/front-side view split screen

●Front-wide view

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the

available views are:

●Rearview/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Rearview/front-side view split screen

●Rear-wide view

The display automatically changes to the Around

View Monitor displaying front-view/bird’s-eye

view when:

●The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and

the sonar detects the vehicle is approaching

an object.

The display will switch from the Around View

Monitor screen when:

●When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-

tion and the vehicle speed increases above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

●When the sonar no longer detects an object

the screen will automatically switch back the

previously displayed screen.

●When a different screen is selected.

PARKING SENSOR (if so equipped)

REAR CENTER SONAR (if so

equipped)

The sonar (parking sensor) sounds a tone to

inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

WARNING

●The sonar (parking sensor) is a conve-

nience feature. It is not a substitute for

proper parking.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

LHA2319 LHA2320

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

●Always look around and check that it is

safe to move before parking.

●Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar (parking sensor) as contained

in this section.

●The colors of the sonar indicators and

the distance guide lines in the front,

front-wide, rear and rear-wide views in-

dicate different distances to the object.

●Inclement weather or Ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car wash,

a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a

pneumatic drill may affect the function

of the system; this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

●This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large stationary

objects to help avoid damaging the

vehicle.

●The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

●The system will not detect small objects

below the bumper, and may not detect

objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

●The system may not detect the follow-

ing objects:

– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,

cotton, glass or wool.

– Thin objects such as rope, wire or

chain.

– Wedge-shaped objects.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

jects or false alarms.

CAUTION

●Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will

interfere with the tone and it may not be

heard.

●Keep the surface of the sonar sensors

(located on the front and rear bumper

fascia) free from accumulations of

snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the

surface of the sonar sensors when

cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the

accuracy of the sonar function will be

diminished.

The system gives the tone for front objects when

the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and both

front and rear objects when the shift lever is in the

R (Reverse) position.

When the camera image is shown on the display,

the system shows the sonar indicator regardless

of the shift selector position.

The system is deactivated at speeds above

10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

When the objects are detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds

intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to

the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow

and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the

tone increase. When the vehicle is very close to

the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns

red, and the tone sounds continuously.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds

when an object is detected by only the corner

sonar and the distance does not change.

The tone will stop when the object gets away

from the vehicle.

When the switch 䊊

1is selected, the indicator 䊊

will turn off and the sonar will be turned off

temporarily. The MOD system will also be turned

off at the same time. When the switch is selected

again, the indicator will turn on and the sonar will

turn back on.

In the below cases, the sonar will be turned back

on automatically:

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

●When the CAMERA button is pressed and a

screen other than the camera view is shown

on the display.

●When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 10 km/h (6 mph).

●When the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position and turned back to the ON

position again.

To prevent the sonar system from activating alto-

gether, use the “Camera Settings” menu. For

additional information, refer to “Around View®

Monitor” in this section.

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION

(MOD)

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can

inform the driver of the moving objects surround-

ing the vehicle when driving out of garages, ma-

neuvering into parking lots and in other such

instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the image

shown in the display.

The MOD system operates in the following con-

ditions when the camera view is displayed:

●When the shift lever is in the P or N position

and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system

detects the moving objects in the bird’s-eye

view. The MOD system will not operate if the

outside mirror is moving in or out or if either

door is opened.

LHA2321

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

●When the shift lever is in the D position and

the vehicle speed is below approximately

8 km/h (5 mph), the MOD system detects

moving objects in the front view or front-

wide view.

●When the shift lever is in the R position and

the vehicle speed is below approximately

8 km/h (5 mph), the MOD system detects

moving objects in the rearview or rear-wide

view. The MOD system will not operate if the

liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect the moving

object during the period from when the “Park-

Guide” key is pressed and the target parking

space selected.

The MOD system does not detect moving ob-

jects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not

displayed on the screen when in this view.

WARNING

●The MOD system is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation and is not de-

signed to prevent contact with the ob-

jects surrounding the vehicle. When

maneuvering, always use the outside

mirror and rear view mirror and turn and

check the surrounding to ensure it is

safe to maneuver.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

●The system is not designed to prevent

contact with all objects.

●The MOD system does not have the

function to detect the surrounding sta-

tionary objects.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the MOD system detects a moving object

near the vehicle, the yellow frame will be dis-

played on the view where the objects are de-

tected and a chime will sound once. While the

MOD system continues to detect moving ob-

jects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊

1is

displayed on each camera image (front, rear,

right, left) depending on where moving objects

are detected.

The yellow frame 䊊

2is displayed on each view in

the front view, front-wide view, rear view and

rear-wide view modes.

While the sonar or the BCI chime is beeping, the

MOD system does not chime.

A blue MOD icon is displayed in the view where

the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is

displayed in the view where the MOD system is

not operative.

When the “MOD” key 䊊

4is selected, the MOD

system will turn off temporarily and the indicator

䊊

5will turn off. At the same time a camera-aiding

sonar will also be turned OFF. When the key is

pressed again, the indicator will turn on and the

MOD system will turn back on.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon 䊊

is not displayed.

The MOD system will turn on automatically under

the following conditions:

●When the shift lever is in the R position.

●When the CAMERA button is pressed to

switch from a different screen to the camera

view on the display

●When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

●When the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position and then back to the ON posi-

tion.

LHA2212

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

To set the MOD system so that it remains off at all

times, use the camera settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Around View® Moni-

tor” in this section.

WARNING

●Do not use the MOD system when tow-

ing a trailer. The system may not func-

tion properly.

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

●The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental con-

ditions and surrounding objects such

as:

– When there is low contrast between

background and the moving objects.

– When there is blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in its

usual position, such as when mirror

is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving ob-

jects in the display is not changed.

●The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, moving

shadows, etc.

●The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, direc-

tion, distance or shape of the moving

objects.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-

ing zone may be altered and the MOD

system may not detect objects properly.

●When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

Camera maintenance

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera,

the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean

the camera.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

VIEW

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around

View® Monitor, press the SETTING button with

the Around View® Monitor on, select the item key

and adjust the level using the INFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con-

trast and Black Level of the Around View® Moni-

tor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the

parking brake is firmly applied.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SETTINGS

To set up the Around View® Monitor to your

preferred settings, press the SETTING button,

select the “Camera” key and press the ENTER

button.

Predictive Course Lines

When this item is turned to ON, the predictive

course lines are displayed in the front view, rear-

view and bird’s-eye view.

Camera View Priority

The view shown on the screen at the beginning of

the Around View® Monitor operation can be

selected in order of priority.

Non-viewable Area Reminder

With this item turned to ON, the non-viewable

area is highlighted in yellow for 7 seconds after

the bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will only be

shown the first time after the ignition switch is

place in the ON position.

Buzzer Volume

Adjust the volume of the buzzer.

MOD (Moving Object Detection)

When this item is turned to ON, the MOD is

activated. When this item is turned to OFF (indi-

cator turns off), the MOD system is deactivated.

When the MOD system is deactivated, “MOD”

䊊

2will disappear on the key䊊

3and the icon 䊊

will disappear as well. When the sonar is turned

OFF on the setting menu as well, the key䊊

3will

disappear.

Sonar

When this item is turned ON, the front and rear

sonar is activated 䊊

1. When this item is turned to

OFF (indicator turns off), the front and rear sonar

is deactivated. The amber markers 䊊

2are dis-

LHA2159 LHA2161 LHA2216

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

played at the corners of the vehicle icon and the

parking sensor icon will disappear on the key 䊊

When the MOD is turned OFF on the setting

menu as well, the switch 䊊

3will disappear. The

next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, “Sonar is OFF” is displayed briefly.

Automatic Display with Parking Sensors

When this item is turned ON, the camera view is

automatically shown on the display in the case

that the distance to the objects measured by the

sonar is becoming short.

Towing Mode:

When this item is turned on, only the rear sonar is

off. The amber markers are displayed at the rear

corners of the vehicle icon.

Show Camera When Sonar Activates:

When this item is turned on, the camera view is

automatically shown on the display in the case

that the distance to the objects measured by the

sonar is becoming short.

Sensors Sensitivity

Adjust the sensitivity level of the corner sonar

higher (+) or lower (-).

VIEW MALFUNCTION

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving

operation but the system should be inspected by

an INFINITI retailer.

LHA2160 LHA2220

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen,

the camera image may be receiving temporary

electronic disturbances from surrounding de-

vices. This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but the system should be inspected by an

INFINITI retailer if it occurs frequently.

OPERATING TIPS

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration. To clean the camera,

wipe with a cloth dampened with a di-

luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

●The screen displayed on the Around View

Monitor will automatically return to the pre-

vious screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA

button has been pressed with the shift lever

in a position other than the R (Reverse)

position.

●When the view is switched, the display im-

ages on the screen may be displayed in

some delay.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light is directly hitting the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

●The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects. This is not a malfunction.

●Objects on the Around View® Monitor may

not be clear and the color of the object may

differ in a dark environment. This is not a

malfunction.

●There may be differences in sharpness be-

tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye

view.

●If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam-

era, the Around View® Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a mild detergent diluted with

water.

LHA2221

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Adjust air flow direction for the center vents 䊊

driver’s and passenger’s side vents 䊊

2, and rear

vents 䊊

3by moving the vent slide and/or vent

assemblies.

Open or close the vents using the dial. Move the

dial toward the to open the vents or toward

the to close them.

The vents underneath the second row seats 䊊

are operational when the air flow mode is

selected. These vents cannot be closed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Air flow control” in

this section.

LHA2324

VENTS

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. (front defroster) button

2. (rear window and outside mirror

defroster) button

3. OFF button

4. (fan speed) decrease button

5. (fan speed) increase button

6. AUTO climate control ON button

7. REAR button

8. Air recirculation button

9. CLIMATE button

10. Temperature control (increase) but-

ton (passenger’s side)

11. Temperature control (decrease)

button (passenger’s side)

12.DUAL button

13. Manual air flow control button (driv-

er’s side)

14. Temperature control (decrease)

button (driver’s side)

15. Temperature control (increase) but-

ton (driver’s side)

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

LHA3155

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the

system automatically works to keep a constant

temperature. Air flow distribution, intake air con-

trol, and fan speed are also controlled automati-

cally.

1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on

the button will illuminate and AUTO will be

displayed.)

2. Operate the driver’s side temperature con-

trol buttons.

●Adjust the temperature display to about

75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution, intake air control, and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

Press the front defroster button on.

(The indicator light on the button will come on.)

2. Operate the temperature control buttons to

set the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, use the fan speed control dial to

set the fan speed to maximum.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, press the AUTO button to return to

the automatic mode.

●When the front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode

automatically turns off, allowing outside air

to be drawn into the passenger compart-

ment to further improve the defogging per-

formance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan control buttons to manually

control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Temperature control

Press the temperature control buttons up or

down to set the desired temperature.

The temperature can be set within the following

range:

●For U.S.: 60 to 90ºF (16 to 32ºC)

●For Canada: 64 to 90ºF (18 to 32ºC)

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to recir-

culate interior air inside the vehicle. The

indicator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when

the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically. To manually control the in-

take air, press the air recirculation button.

To return to the automatic control mode, press

and hold the air recirculation button for

about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash

twice, and then the intake air will be controlled

automatically.

Air flow control

Press the button to manually control air

flow. Pressing the button repeatedly will cycle

through the available modes and display the cor-

responding icon on the center display:

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS

●When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-

ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets

will operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s

side of the instrument panel, helps the system

maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-

thing on or around this sensor.

LHA2173

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

CLIMATE SETTING SCREEN

Climate control settings can be changed on the

screen.

Press the CLIMATE button on the instrument

panel and turn the display to the Climate mode.

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate in this mode.

When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the CLIMATE button.

2. If the “A/C” indicator on the screen illumi-

nates, select the “A/C” key. (The “A/C” indi-

cator will turn off.)

3. Press the temperature control button to set

the desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature or the system may

not work properly.

●This procedure is not recommended if win-

dows fog up.

When the outside temperature decreases to ap-

proximately 32°F (0°C), the A/C function does

not activate even if the “A/C” indicator light illu-

minates.

Dual control mode setting

You can individually set the driver and front pas-

senger side temperature and air flow mode using

each temperature control button or manual air

flow control button.

1. Press the CLIMATE button.

2. By touching the “DUAL” key, or when the

passenger side temperature control button

or manual air control button is pushed, the

“DUAL” indicator on the screen will illumi-

nate.

3. To turn off the passenger side temperature

control, touch the “DUAL” key and the

“DUAL” indicator will turn off.

●The Dual control mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front de-

frosting mode.

Advanced Climate Control System

(ACCS) (if so equipped)

The Advanced Climate Control System (ACCS)

keeps the air inside of the vehicle clean, using the

ion control and the automatic air intake control

with exhaust gas detecting sensor.

LHA2167

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Ion control

This unit generates highly concentrated Plasma-

cluster® ions into the air blown from the vents

and reduces odor absorbed into the interior trim.

When the air conditioner is turned on, the system

generates Plasmacluster® ions automatically.

The amount of Plasmacluster® ions increases

according to the amount of air flow. When the air

flow is high, is displayed on the screen and

when the air flow is low, the indication in the

screen changes to .

Plasmacluster® and Plasmacluster® ion are

registered trademarks of Sharp Corporation.

Exhaust gas/outside odor detection sensor

This vehicle is equipped with an exhaust gas

detection sensor. When the automatic intake air

control is ON, the sensor detects industry odors

such as pulp or chemicals, and exhaust gas such

as gasoline or diesel. When such odors or gas

are detected, the system automatically changes

from the outside air circulation mode to the recir-

culation mode.

When the intake air control button is pushed

under the following conditions, the indicator light

on the button will illuminate and the ex-

haust gas detection sensor will turn on.

●

The air flow control is not in the front defroster

mode (the indicator light on the front

defroster button is turned off).

●The outside temperature is about 32°F (0°C)

or more.

When the automatic intake air control is ON, for

the first 5 minutes, the recirculation mode is

selected to prevent dust, dirt and pollen from

entering the vehicle and cleans the air inside of

the vehicle with positive and negative ions that

are emitted from the vent.

After the 5 minutes, the sensor detects exhaust

gas and automatically alternates between the

recirculation mode and outside air circulation

mode.

LHA2222

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

REAR AUTOMATIC AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM

1. OFF button

2. (fan speed) increase and decrease

buttons

3. AUTO button

4. REAR button

5. (temperature) increase and decrease

buttons (driver’s side)

To control the rear automatic air conditioning

system with the front air conditioner control

panel, press the REAR button with the front air

conditioning system on. When the rear automatic

air conditioning system control is on, the indicator

light on the REAR button will illuminate and the

front display will switch to the Rear Air-

conditioning screen.

The rear automatic air conditioning system can

be adjusted with the front air conditioner control

panel when the Rear Air-conditioning screen is

displayed.

To adjust the front air conditioning system, press

the REAR button once more. The Rear Air-

conditioning screen will no longer be displayed.

Automatic operation

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator

light will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear

on the display.

2. Press the temperature increase and de-

crease buttons (driver’s side) to set the de-

sired temperature.

Manual operation

●Temperature control

Press the temperature increase and de-

crease buttons (driver’s side) to set the de-

sired temperature.

●Fan speed control

Press the (fan speed) increase and

decrease buttons to manually control the fan

speed.

Front Controls

LHA3190

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Rear Heating (A/C off)

1. Press the REAR button to display the Rear

Air-conditioning screen on the front display

when the rear automatic air conditioning

system is on.

2. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator

light will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear

on the display.

3. If the A/C indicator light illuminates on the

touchscreen, touch the A/C button.

4. Press the temperature increase and de-

crease buttons (driver’s side) to set the de-

sired temperature.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may cause

the temperature to not be controlled prop-

erly.

●To dehumidify the air, touch the A/C button

on the touchscreen before turning on the

heater.

Turning the system off

1. Press the REAR button on the front control

panel until the Rear Air-conditioning screen

is displayed.

2. Press the OFF button. The rear climate con-

trols will turn off.

LHA2168

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Rear control buttons

1. OFF button

2. (fan speed increase) button

3. AUTO button

4. (temperature increase) button

5. (temperature decrease) button

6. Display

7. (fan speed decrease) button

The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear

automatic air conditioning system using the con-

trol switches at the rear of the center console.

The rear control buttons do not function when the

Rear Air-conditioning screen is shown on the

front display. To activate the rear control buttons,

press the REAR button on the front air condi-

tioner control panel and switch the screen on the

front display.

●OFF button Turns rear automatic air condi-

tioning system off.

●Fan speed increase and decrease but-

tons Adjusts the rear fan speed up or down.

●AUTO button Turns rear automatic air con-

ditioning system on, AUTO mode on.

●Temperature increase and decrease

buttons Adjusts the rear temperature up or

down.

Rear Controls

LHA2134

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The air conditioner system in your INFINITI ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your INFINITI air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. For additional information, refer to “Air

conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-

dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

An INFINITI retailer is able to service your “envi-

ronmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid per-

sonal injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experienced

technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF

(power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to

the radio with the engine not running, the ignition

switch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction

in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-

able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception.

XM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio, Inc. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

LHA0099

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) player (models

without Navigation System)

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD changer/player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

changer.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)

CD).

CD/DVD combination player (models

with Navigation System)

●Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD

insert slot. This could damage the

CD/DVD player.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the

CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate

the player completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot

function when the passenger compart-

ment temperature is extremely high.

Decrease the temperature before use.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”

logo on the disc or packaging.

●Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct

sunlight.

●CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,

dirty, scratched, covered with finger-

prints, or that have pinholes may not

work properly.

●The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-

anteed to play:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Recordable compact discs (DVD±R,

DVD±R DL)

●Rewritable compact discs

(DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL)

●Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as

they may cause the CD/DVD player to

malfunction.

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs

●CDs/DVDs that are not round

●CDs/DVDs with a paper label

●CDs/DVDs that are warped,

scratched, or have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa-

bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.

●If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of

the following messages will be dis-

played.

Disc Read Error:

●Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent

or warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

This error may be due to the tempera-

ture inside the player getting too high.

Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the

EJECT button, and after a short time

reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can

be played when the temperature of the

player returns to normal. If the error

persists, consult your local retailer.

Unplayable File:

●The file may be copy protected.

●The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A

or DIVX type.

Region Invalid

●The DVD is not for region 1 or all

regions.

●Use DVDs with a region code “1”,

“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD

entertainment system. (The region

code 䊊

Ais displayed as a small sym-

bol printed on the top of the DVD

䊊

B.) This vehicle-installed DVD

player cannot play DVDs with a re-

gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●The technology protected by the U.S.

patent and other intellectual property

rights owned by Macrovision

Corporation and other right holders is

adopted for this system.

●This copyright protected technology

cannot be used without a permit from

Macrovision Corporation. It is limited

to personal use, etc., as long as the

permit from Macrovision Corporation

is not issued.

●Modifying or disassembling is prohib-

ited.

●Dolby digital is manufactured under li-

cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●Dolby and the double D mark “ ”

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,

Inc.

●DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ”

are registered trademarks of Digital

Theater Systems, Inc.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately as

necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB de-

vices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some states/area, the USB device for the front

seats plays only sound without images for regu-

latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory de-

vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some

USB devices may not be supported by this sys-

tem.

LHA0484

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

●Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is rec-

ommended.

General notes for USB use:

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

Notes for iPod® use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod® is connected properly.

●An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-

nected during a seek operation. In this case,

please manually reset the iPod®.

●An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

●Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-

mentarily black out, but will soon recover.

●If an iPod® automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

center display may momentarily black out,

but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so

equipped)

●Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible Bluetooth®

audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module before using the Bluetooth® audio.

●Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-

dio will vary depending on the devices. Make

sure how to operate your audio device be-

fore using it with this system.

●The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-

der the following conditions:

●Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

●Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

●Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in

an area surrounded by metal or far away from

the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent

tone quality degradation and wireless con-

nection disruption.

●While an audio device is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

●This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Clarion Co., Ltd.

CD or USB with Compressed Audio

Files (models without Navigation

System)

The file types supported by this system are MP3

and WMA.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Explanation of terms

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, encoding bit

rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the Artist/song title

line on the display.

* Windows®, Windows Media® and Windows

Vista® are registered trademarks and trade-

marks in the United States of America and other

countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA

files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/USB device is inserted correctly.

Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3” or “.WMA” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and

file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-

ing application or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the CD/USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the

player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

CD, DVD or USB with Compressed

Audio Files (models with Navigation

System)

The file types supported by this system are MP3,

WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.

Explanation of terms

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by ap-

proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,

Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-

tible loss in quality. The compression re-

duces certain parts of sound that seem in-

audible to most people.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding

(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.

Audio files that have been encoded with

AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver

a higher quality of sound than MP3.

●ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans-

form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy

audio compression format developed by

Sony.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows®, Windows Media® and Windows

Vista® are registered trademarks or trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of

America and/or other countries.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB

device with compressed audio files is as illus-

trated.

●The folder names of folders not containing

compressed audio files are not shown in the

display.

●If there is a file in the top level of the

disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1374

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB 2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista® operating system-based computer) are not supported.

UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0

* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz

Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

ATRAC Version ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus

Tag information (Song title and artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-

CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-

ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-

ing application or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts

playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the

player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Compressed Video Files (models with

Navigation System)

Explanation of terms

●DivX – DivX refers to the DivX® codec

owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-

sion of video based on MPEG-4.

●AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.

It is standard file format originated by Micro-

soft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can be

saved into the .avi file format for playback on

this system if it meets the requirements

stated in the table in this section. However,

all .avi files are not playable on this system

since different encodings can be used other

than the DivX® codec.

●ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems

Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft

Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet

the requirements stated in the table in this

section can be played.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital video files.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

1. PUSH ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

2. SEEK/CAT/TRACK button (back)

3. SEEK/CAT/TRACK button (forward)

4. FM·AM button

5. XM button*

6. DISC·AUX button

7. RDM (random)/RPT (repeat) button

8. SCAN button

9. CD eject button

10. PUSH AUDIO button/TUNE/FOLDER con-

trol knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

*No satellite radio reception is available when the

AUX button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information on all operation pre-

cautions, refer to ⬙Audio operation precautions⬙

in this section.

Audio main operation

Head unit

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both radio

reception and CD playback.

SAA2957

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VOL (volume)/ON·OFF control

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF

control knob while the system is off to call up the

mode that was playing immediately before the

system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF

control knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the

volume.

Audio settings

Press the SETTING button and select the “Au-

dio” key to adjust the following audio settings.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade

To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound

balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or

“Fade” key and adjust it with the INFINITI control-

ler.

Fade adjusts the sound level between the front

and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound

between the right and left speakers.

The AUDIO control knob can also be used to

change the bass, treble, balance and fade set-

tings. Press the AUDIO control knob to change

the mode as follows:

Bass →Treble →Balance →Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press

the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode

appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to

adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You

can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and

Balance modes.

Models without Navigation System

LHA2137

Models with Navigation System

LHA2147

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-

peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.

If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-

mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear.

BOSE® Centerpoint® (if so equipped)

When this item is turned to ON, an exciting

surround sound effect is generated from a tradi-

tional stereo recording.

Surround Effect (models with Navigation

System)

To adjust the surround sound volume, select

“Surround Effect” key and adjust it with the

INFINITI controller.

Speed Sensitive Vol.

The audio system’s volume is increased with the

vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Sensitive Vol.”

key and adjust the effect level with the INFINITI

controller. The Speed Sensitive Volume function

is turned off when the level is set to OFF. Increas-

ing the value will cause the volume to increase

faster with vehicle speed.

DivX® Registration Code (models with

Navigation System)

The registration code for a device that is used to

download DivX® files will be displayed on the

screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is

connected to the audio system, this function will

not be activated.

Display Album Cover Art (models with

Navigation System)

When this item is turned to ON, the album cover

image is displayed when playing iPod® or MP3

music files through a CD, DVD or USB memory

device. The image will not be displayed when the

image is not properly embedded in the file or

device.

Switching the display

Press the DISC·AUX button to switch the dis-

plays as follows:

●Models without Navigation System

iPod®/USB →CD →iPod®/USB

●Models with Navigation System

iPod®/USB →CD/DVD →Bluetooth® Audio →

iPod®/USB

Linking Intelligent Key (models with Navi-

gation System)

The audio settings can be memorized for each

Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to

“Setting memory function” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM band select

Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band

as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

When the FM·AM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM

button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-

matically be turned off and the last radio station

played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate

during FM stereo reception. When the stereo

broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati-

cally change from stereo to monaural reception.

XM band select

Pressing the XM button will change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1

When the XM button is pressed while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will

come on at the station last played.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

text information is automatically displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and

insert the compact disc into the slot with the label

side facing up. The compact disc will be guided

automatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-

pact disc was playing, pressing the

VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact

disc.

DISC·AUX button

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will start

to play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the

compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

compact disc will start to play.

SEEK•CAT/TRACK button

When the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button is

pressed while a compact disc is playing,

the track being played returns to its beginning.

Press several times to skip back through tracks.

The compact disc will go back the number of

times the button is pressed.

When the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button is

pressed while the compact disc is playing,

the next track will start to play from its beginning.

Press several times to skip through tracks. The

compact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pressed. (When the last track on the

compact disc is skipped through, the first track

will be played.)

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select

tracks when a CD is playing.

SEEK•CAT/TRACK

(Rewind and Fast

Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK•CAT/TRACK

button to reverse the track as it is playing.

Press and hold the SEEK•CAT/TRACK

button to fast forward the track as it is

playing. When the button is released, the com-

pact disc will return to normal play speed.

TUNE/FOLDER knob

While playing a CD with compressed audio files,

turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play

the next or previous folder.

Text (models without Navigation System)

Select the “Text” key using the INFINITI controller

and then press the ENTER button while the CD is

being played to display the music information

below.

CD:

●Disc title

●Track title

CD with compressed audio files:

●Folder title

●File title

●Song title

●Album title

●Artist

Menu (models with Navigation System)

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected

while the CD is being played, the menu screen

will be displayed. The following menu options are

available.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

●Folder List (for CD with compressed audio

files)

Displays the folder list.

●Track List

Displays the track list.

●Play Mode

Select a play mode from the following items.

– Normal

– 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com-

pressed audio files)

– 1 Track Repeat

– 1 Disc Random

– 1 Folder Random (for CD with com-

pressed audio files)

RDM·RPT (random and repeat) button

Press the RDM·RPT button while a compact disc

is playing to change the play pattern as follows:

Normal →1 Track Repeat →1 Disc Random →

Normal

CD with compressed audio files

Normal →1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →Normal

Normal: No repeat or random pattern is applied.

1 Track Repeat: the current track playing will be

repeated.

1 Disc Random: all tracks will be played ran-

domly.

1 Folder Repeat: the folder currently being ac-

cessed will be repeated.

1 Folder Random: the tracks in the current folder

being accessed will be played randomly.

CD EJECT button

When the button is pressed with the com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

When the button is pressed while the

compact disc is being played, the compact disc

will eject and the system will turn off.

Front AUX (auxiliary) input jacks (inside

center console)

The front auxiliary input jacks are located inside

the center console 䊊

1. NTSC compatible de-

vices such as video games, camcorders and

portable video players can be connected to the

auxiliary input jacks. Audio devices, such as some

MP3 players, can also be connected to the sys-

tem through the auxiliary input jacks.

The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-

tification purposes:

●Red – right channel audio input

●White – left channel audio input

●Yellow – video input

LHA2140

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input

jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the aux-

iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the

display. The output from the device will be played

through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)

Park position and the parking brake engaged)

and audio system.

1. Left rear passenger’s headphone jack

2. Right rear passenger’s headphone jack

3. Right rear passenger’s power on button / vol-

ume control knob

4. Rear auxiliary input jacks

5. Left rear passenger’s power on button / vol-

ume control knob

Rear AUX (auxiliary) input jacks (on back

of center console)

The rear auxiliary input jacks are located on the

back of the center console. NTSC compatible

devices such as video games, camcorders and

portable video players can be connected to the

auxiliary input jacks. Audio devices, such as some

MP3 players, can also be connected to the sys-

tem through the auxiliary input jacks.

The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-

tification purposes:

●Red – right channel audio input

●White – left channel audio input

●Yellow – video input

Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input

jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.

When headphones are plugged into the rear

jacks, sound can be turned on by pressing the

volume control knob and then turning to increase

or decrease the volume.

LHA2135

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

AUX settings

Select the “Menu” key using the INFINITI control-

ler.

The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or

Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,

Medium or High.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod® player

available with this system, refer to “iPod® player

operation without navigation system” or “iPod®

player operation with navigation system” in this

section.

For additional information about the USB (Uni-

versal Serial Bus) Connect Port available with

this system, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port (models without navigation sys-

tem)” or “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port (models with navigation system)” in this sec-

tion.

For additional information about the Bluetooth®

streaming audio feature available with this sys-

tem, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this

section.

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)

PLAYER OPERATION (models with

Navigation System)

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-

ment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front display

while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce

driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie

is played. To view movies on the front display,

stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position and apply the park-

ing brake.

LHA2150 LHA1394

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●The driver must not attempt to operate

the DVD system or wear the head-

phones while the vehicle is in motion so

that full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

●Do not attempt to modify the system to

display a movie on the front screen

while the vehicle is being driven. Doing

so may distract the driver and may

cause a collision and serious personal

injury or death.

CAUTION

●Only operate the DVD while the vehicle

engine is running. Operating the DVD

for extended periods of time with the

engine OFF can discharge the vehicle

battery.

●Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-

uids may cause the system to

malfunction.

●While playing VIDEO-CD media, this

DVD player does not guarantee com-

plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD

formats.

Display settings

To adjust the front display mode, press the SET-

TING button while the DVD is playing. Select the

“Others” key with the INFINITI controller or with

the touch-screen, then select the “Display” key.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,

color and contrast, select the “Display Adjust-

ment” key with the INFINITI controller or with the

touch-screen and then select the key of the set-

ting you wish to adjust. After the desired changes

have been made, press the BACK button to save

the settings.

Playing a DVD

DISC-AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front

seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while

watching the images.

Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode

is active on the display.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-

matically.

The operation screen will be turned on when the

DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is

playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-

matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,

press the DISC-AUX button.

LHA2165

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models

without Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB connection port is located in the center

console. Insert the USB device into the port䊊

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the port, compatible audio files on the stor-

age device can be played through the vehicle’s

audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to switch to

the USB input mode. If another audio source is

playing and a USB memory device is inserted,

press the AUX button repeatedly until the center

display changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL

control knob to restart the USB memory.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

buttons

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)

button or TRACK (fast forward) button for

1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB

device is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The track plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file re-

turns to normal play speed.

WHA1366

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the TRACK button while an audio

file on the USB device is playing to advance one

track. Press the TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the last

track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

Folder selection

To change to another folder in the USB memory,

turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder

displayed on the screen.

RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button

When the RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button is

pressed while the USB memory is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

Repeat All →1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat

→All Random →1 Folder Random →Repeat All

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models with

Navigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

WHA1366 LHA1378

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB connection port is located in the center

console. Insert the USB device into the port 䊊

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the port, compatible audio files on the stor-

age device can be played through the vehicle’s

audio system.

Audio file operation

DISC•AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the DISC•AUX button to

switch to the USB input mode. If another audio

source is playing and a USB memory device is

inserted, press the DISC•AUX button repeatedly

until the center display changes to the USB

memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL

control knob to restart the USB memory.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

buttons

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)

button or TRACK (fast forward) button for

1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB

device is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The track plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file re-

turns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the TRACK button while an audio

file on the USB device is playing to advance one

track. Press the TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the last

track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

Folder selection

To change to another folder in the USB memory,

turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder

displayed on the screen.

RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button

When the RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button is

pressed while the USB memory is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

Normal →1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →

All Random →1 Folder Random →Normal

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu (models with Navigation System)

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following that are dis-

played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the

following information for each item.

●Movie Playback

Switch to the movie playback mode. This

item is displayed only when the USB

memory contains movie files.

The shift lever must be in Park (P) with the

parking brake engaged to watch movies

from a USB device.

●Folder List/Track List

Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie

Playback” key is also displayed in this list

screen and enables you to switch to the

movie playback mode.

●Play Mode

Choose the preferred play mode using the

INFINITI controller or the touch-screen.

Movie file operation

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the USB

memory while watching the images.

DISC-AUX button

When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the USB memory inserted, the

system will turn on. If another audio source is

playing and the USB memory is inserted, press

the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center

display changes to the USB memory mode.

LHA1294 LHA1379

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Operation keys

To operate the USB memory, select the desired

key displayed on the display screen.

●Pause

Select the key to pause the movie file.

To resume playing the movie file, use

the key.

●Play

Select the key to start playing the

movie file or resume the movie file if it has

been paused.

●Stop

Select the key to stop playing the

movie file.

●Next Chapter/Fast Forward

Select the key to skip the chapter(s)

of the disc forward. The chapters will ad-

vance the number of times the key is se-

lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-

ward the chapter.

●Previous Chapter/Rewind

Select the key to skip the chapter(s)

of the disc backward. The chapters will go

back the number of times the key is selected.

Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-

ter.

List

Select the “List” key on the movie file operation

screen to display the file list.

Settings

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following

settings:

●Audio File Playback

Switch to the audio playback mode. This

item is displayed only when the USB

memory contains audio files.

●Play Mode

Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track

Repeat” play modes.

LHA1380

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●10 Key Search

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number you

want to search for and the specified file or

folder will be played.

●Display

Adjust the image quality of the screen.

●DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-

matically adjusts the soundtrack volume

level to maintain a more even sound to the

speakers.

●Audio

Choose the preferred language of the audio.

●Subtitle

Choose the preferred language of the sub-

titles.

●Display Mode

Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,

“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located in the center console. Con-

nect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the

iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB

connection port on the vehicle 䊊

1. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

tery will be charged while connected to the ve-

hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

WHA1366

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®

interface. Use the INFINITI controller and the

BACK button to play the iPod® with your favorite

settings.

The following items can be chosen from the menu

list screen. For additional information, refer to the

iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each item, .

●Playlists

●Podcasts

●Songs

●Albums

●Artists

●Genres

●Composers

●Audiobooks

The following keys shown on the screen are also

available:

●MENU: returns to the previous screen.

●: plays/pauses the music selected.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons

When the SEEK/CAT button or

TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the iPod®

will be played.

When the SEEK/CAT button or

TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will

play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the iPod® will return to the

normal play speed.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

LHA1396 WHA1366

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located in the center console. Con-

nect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the

iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB

connection port on the vehicle 䊊

1. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

tery will be charged while connected to the ve-

hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version

1.2.3 or later)

●iPod® Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 or

later)

●iPod® Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 or

later)*

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully

functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly

to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control

knob will start the iPod®.

DISC·AUX button

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the iPod® connected, the system

will turn on. If another audio source is playing and

the iPod® is connected, press the DISC·AUX

button repeatedly until the center display

changes to the iPod® mode.

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®

interface. Use the INFINITI controller and the

BACK button to play the iPod® with your favorite

settings. The touch-screen can also be used to

control your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the menu

list screen. For additional information, refer to the

iPod® Owner’s Manual.

●Now Playing

●Playlists

●Artists

LHA1397 LHA1398

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

●Albums

●Songs

●Podcasts

●Genres

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Shuffle Songs

●Play Mode

The following keys shown on the screen are also

available:

●MENU: returns to the previous screen.

●: plays/pauses the music selected. Play mode

While the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key

to display the iPod® menu. Touch the “Play

Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and

adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-

books. For additional information, refer to the

iPod® Owner’s Manual.

SEEK•CAT/TRACK buttons

When the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button is

pressed or for less than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the iPod®

will be played.

When the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button is

pressed or for more than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will

play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the iPod® will return to the

normal play speed.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select

tracks when the iPod® is playing.

LHA1315

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Scrolling menus

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or

songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll

the list by the first letter. To activate letter index-

ing, perform one of the following:

●Turn the INFINITI controller quickly.

●Press and hold the up/down directional ar-

rows on the INFINITI controller.

●Touch and hold the page up/down arrows

on the touch-screen.

To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of

the following:

●Press the ENTER button on the INFINITI

controller.

●Push the ENTER switch on the steering

wheel.

●Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

(if so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers. Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Touch the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

LHA1399 LHA1316

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

nected, press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly

until the display changes to the Bluetooth® audio

mode.

SEEK•CAT/TRACK button

Press the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button for

less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio

file is being played to advance to the beginning of

the next track.

Press the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button for

more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio

file is being played to advance the track. The

Bluetooth® audio device will play while fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the

Bluetooth® audio device will return to normal

play speed.

Press the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button for

less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio

file is being played to return to the beginning of

the current track.

Press the SEEK•CAT/TRACK button for

more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio

file is being played to reverse the track. The

Bluetooth® audio device will play while revers-

ing. When the button is released, the Bluetooth®

audio device will return to normal play speed.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select

tracks when the Bluetooth® audio play mode

screen is shown on the display. (“Bluetooth au-

dio” will be indicated on the header of the

screen.)

RDM (random)/RPT (repeat) button

Press the RDM·RPT button repeatedly to change

the play mode as follows:

Normal →Shuffle All Tracks →Shuffle Group →

Repeat 1 Track →Repeat All Tracks →Repeat

Group →Normal

Operation keys

To operate a Bluetooth® audio device, select a

key displayed on the operation screen using the

INFINITI controller.

Play

Select the “ ” key to start playing after it has

been paused. Select this key again to pause the

audio play.

Pause

Select the “ ” key to pause the Bluetooth ®

audio device. Select this key again to resume

playing.

Play Mode

Select the “Menu” key to alter the play mode.

Choose the preferred play mode from the follow-

ing items:

●Shuffle

Choose from “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All

Tracks” and “Shuffle Group”

●Repeat

Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1

Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat

Group”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

It is also possible that the headphones may be

too far from the transmitter which is in the rear

display screen. This is not a malfunction.

The sound may also be interrupted temporarily

when there is an obstacle between the head-

phones and the transmitter. Remove the ob-

stacle, such as opaque materials, hands, hair,

etc.

Channel change

When the rear displays are playing different

sources, slide the Display Select switch to select

the sound. “Left” is the sound on the left display.

“Right” is the sound on the right display.

The selected headphone channel (⬙Left⬙or

⬙Right⬙)䊊

1will appear on the menu screen on the

rear display.

LHA2672 JVH0360X

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Remote control

The remote control has the following functions:

1. POWER button

2. Display select switch (L or R)

3. MENU button

4. Directional buttons

5. Backlight button

6. SETUP button

7. (next chapter) button

8. (fast forward) button

9. (stop) button

10. Volume control button

11. (reverse) button

12. (play and pause) button

13. (previous chapter) button

14. BACK button

15. ENTER button

16. SOURCE button

Select rear displays audio source

Slide the display select switch on the remote

control to the left (L) or right (R) to select each

screen source individually.

The SOURCE button on the remote control se-

lects the source for front and rear screens at

once.

Remote control and headphones

battery replacement

CAUTION

●An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the components.

LHA3169

SAA0978

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

To replace the battery:

1. Open the lid as illustrated.

●For headphones, remove the screw 䊊

with a flat-bladed screwdriver before re-

moving the lid.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

●Recommended battery:

Size AA 6 2 (DVD remote control)

Size AAA 6 2 (headphones)

●Be careful not to touch the battery termi-

nal.

●Make sure that the (+) and (-) ends on the

batteries match the markings inside the

compartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

●If you will not be using the remote control

for long periods of time, remove the bat-

teries.

●Replacement of the batteries is needed

when the remote control only functions at

extremely close distances to the Dual

Head Restraint/Headrest DVD System or

when it does not function at all.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment. This device complies

with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210

of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

BEFORE OPERATING DUAL HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST DVD

SYSTEM

Precautions

Start the engine when using the Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest DVD System.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the

Dual Head Restraint/Headrest DVD Sys-

tem or wear the headphones while the

vehicle is in motion so that full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

●Only operate the Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest DVD System while

the vehicle engine is running. Operating

the Dual Head Restraint/Headrest DVD

System for extended periods of time

with the engine OFF can discharge the

vehicle battery.

SAA3081

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-

uids may cause the system to

malfunction.

●While playing VIDEO-CD media, this

DVD player does not guarantee com-

plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD

formats.

Parental level (parental control)

Video data with the parental control setting can

be played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection

You can play the following disc formats with the

DVD player:

●DVD-VIDEO

●VIDEO-CD

●DTS-CD

Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the code

applicable to your country. The region code is

displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of

the DVD. This vehicle-installed DVD player can

only play DVDs with an applicable region code.

Available audio sources

The following sources are available to play on

each display:

Front display

●Radio

●CD/DVD

●USB memory/iPod®

●Bluetooth® audio

●AUX (front)

Rear display

●DVD

●USB memory with video files

●AUX (front/rear)

PLAYING A DVD (Digital Versatile

Disc)

DISC·AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the DVD

player while watching the images.

Insert a DVD into the CD/DVD slot with the

labeled side up. The DVD will be guided auto-

matically into the slot. When ejecting the DVD,

press the EJECT button.

Front display

SAA3069

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Title Menu (front)/Menu (rear) (DVD-

VIDEO)

Menus specific to each disc will be shown. For

additional information, refer to the instructions

attached to the disc.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO)

A scene that belongs to a specified title will be

displayed each time the “+” side or “⫺” side is

selected.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,

CDDA)

Select the “10 Key Search” key and press the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number you want to search for and

select the “OK” key with the INFINITI controller.

Then press the ENTER button. The specified

Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO)

If the DVD contains different angles (such as

moving images), the current image angle can be

switched to another one.

Select the “Angle” key and press the ENTER

button. When the “+”side or “⫺” side is selected,

the angle will change.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be

shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene

can be seen from a different angle.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)

DVD menus are automatically configured and the

contents will be played directly when the “Menu

Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may

not be played directly even if this item is turned

on.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)

The amount of seconds for CM Skip can be set to

15, 30 or 60 seconds.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO)

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows tun-

ing of the dynamic range of sound recorded in the

Dolby Digital format.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD)

Select the “DVD Language” key and press the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number corresponding to the preferred

language and select the “OK” key with the

INFINITI controller. Then press the ENTER but-

ton. The DVD top menu language will be changed

to the one selected.

Display

Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the

preferred adjustment items and press the ENTER

button.

Audio

Choose the preferred language using the

INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO)

Choose the preferred language using the

INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button.

To turn off the subtitles, press and hold the EN-

TER button until a beep sounds.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD)

Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal”or “Cin-

ema” mode using the INFINITI controller and

press the ENTER button.

Play Mode

Choose the preferred play mode using the

INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button.

Remote control operation

Use the remote control to adjust the following

items.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Rear display ON/OFF

The rear displays can be activated or deactivated

individually.

To activate or deactivate the rear displays, press

the preferred side (L or R) of the ON·OFF button

on the remote control.

Joystick

Use the joystick to select the items displayed on

the rear screen.

ENTER button

Press the ENTER button to make the selected

item complete on the rear screen.

BACK button

Press to go back to the previous screen or cancel

the selection.

DVD mode

Press the DVD button to select the DVD mode.

AUX mode

The AUX (auxiliary input jacks) modes can be

activated or deactivated individually. To activate

the AUX mode, press the preferred side (L or R)

of the AUX button. Press the AUX button again to

deactivate the AUX mode and display another

mode.

Volume

To control the volume level, push the VOL

button or .

Display

Display settings can be set individually for the

right and left screens.

Press the preferred side (L or R) of the DISP

button to adjust the rear display settings.

Sound

To change the language, press the SOUND but-

ton. Each time the button is pressed, the lan-

guage will change to each language stored in the

DVD.

Track/Channel

Press to skip to the previous or next DVD scene

selection.

Rear display settings

To adjust the rear display settings, select the

preferred key and press the ENTER button. The

following settings are available:

Aspect

Select the display size from “CINEMA”, “WIDE”,

“FULL” or “NORMAL” using the joystick on the

remote control.

Picture Mode

To adjust the display brightness automatically,

select the “Brightness” key and then select from

“Darker”, “Normal” or “Brighter”. When adjusting

manually, select “OFF” and adjust using the joy-

stick on the remote control and tilt the joystick to

the right or left.

To adjust tint, color, contrast or black level, select

a key using the joystick on the remote control and

tilt the joystick to the right or left.

Press the BACK button on the remote control to

apply the settings and return to the previous

display.

To return the adjustment levels to the default

value, select “Execute” next to “Initialization” us-

ing the joystick on the remote control and press

the ENTER button. The “Execute” key is deacti-

vated when the picture mode settings are already

in the default value.

Color System

To choose the color system, select from “NTSC”,

“PAL”, “PAL-60”, “PAL-M”, “PAL-N” or “AUTO”

using the joystick on the remote control and tilt

the joystick to the right or left.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

3D Y/C filter

Set to ON/OFF using the joystick on the remote

control. When turned on, small characters and an

outline of the shapes will be displayed more

clearly than when turned off.

AUX Volume Setting

To set the AUX volume, select from “High”, “Low”

or “Middle” using the joystick on the remote con-

trol and tilt the joystick to the right or left.

OPERATING TIPS

●The images from a device that is connected

to the rear auxiliary input jacks cannot be

viewed on the front displays.

●It is not possible to switch the source to USB

(if so equipped) or DVD using the remote

control when the rear display is in the AUX

mode. Press the AUX (L)/ AUX (R) button in

the remote control and turn off the AUX

mode, and then push the preferred mode

switch.

●It is not possible to display different video

files, such as DVD or video files in the USB

memory, on the front and rear displays at the

same time.

●It is not possible to play an audio file and a

video file in the same USB memory at the

same time.

Multiple source display

It is possible to play different sources on each

display. The following example shows how to

operate multiple sources.

1. Display a video file in the front display by

selecting the DVD mode.

2. Press the L side on the power ON·OFF

button on the remote control. The left rear

display comes on and the DVD screen will

be displayed.

3. Press the R side on the power ON·OFF

button on the remote control. The right rear

display comes on and the DVD screen will

be displayed.

4. Switch the source on the front display to an

audio source. The sound from the speakers

switches according to the front display. The

rear display continues to display the DVD.

5. Turn on a pair of headphones and listen to

the DVD on the rear displays using the head-

phones.

6. Connect an auxiliary device into the AUX

jacks and press the AUX (L)/AUX (R) button

on the remote control. The selected side of

the rear display turns to the AUX mode. The

other rear display continues to display the

DVD.

7. Turn on the other pair of headphones. If the

sound from the headphones is not from the

AUX jacks, switch the channel with the

channel select switch on the headphones.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the

surfaces of your Dual Head Restraint/Headrest

DVD System (DVD player face, screen, remote

control, etc.).

CAUTION

●Do not use any solvents or cleaning

solutions when cleaning the video

system.

●Do not use excessive force on the moni-

tor screen.

●Avoid touching or scratching the moni-

tor screen as it may become dirty or

damaged.

●Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

⫺4°F (⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]

●Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme humidity conditions (less than

10% or more than 75%).

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of

cellular phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harnesses. Do not route the an-

tenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, consult an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

Your INFINITI is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting

procedure is required. Your phone is automatically

connected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with

the previously connected cellular phone turned on

and carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the hands-free

phone system.

●

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone

module. Visit www.infinitiusacom/bluetooth or

www.infiniti.ca/bluetooth for a recommended

phone list and connecting instructions.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

LHA3157

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●If the hands-free phone system seems to be

malfunctioning, refer to “Troubleshooting

guide” in this section. You can also visit

www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth or

www.infiniti.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone

System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition (VR),

press and release the button located on

the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak

a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Make sure the command is

said exactly as prompted by the system and

repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-

sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, press the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

●In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel.

●To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example,

press the button and after the tone

say, “Call Redial.”

How to say numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following rules and examples.

●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

●Words can be used for the first four digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred”

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continue en-

tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-

able when using the “Special Number” com-

mand and the “Send” command during a

call).

For additional information, refer to “List of

voice commands” and “Special number” in

this section.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using

the “Special Number” command).

●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available

only when storing a phone book number).

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any

time. Please use the “Help” command to get

information on how to use the system.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-

back to speak the next command by pressing

the button on the steering wheel. After

interrupting the system, wait for a beep before

speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VR

session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to

interrupt the system feedback and

give a command at once. For addi-

tional information, refer to “List of

voice commands” and “During a call”

in this section.

LHA2566

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition system is

active, press and hold the but-

ton for 5 seconds to quit the voice

recognition system at any time.

TUNING SWITCH

While using the voice recognition

system, tilt the tuning switch up or

down to manually control the phone

system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System with INFINITI Voice Recognition. For ad-

ditional command options, refer to “List of voice

commands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System using English, Spanish or

French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel

2. Select the “Language & Units” key

3. Select desired language and press enter on

the control panel

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” 䊊

“Add phone” 䊊

Initiate from handset 䊊

Name phone 䊊

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the available

commands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊

A. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

connecting from the phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional information, re-

fer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

You can also visit

www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth or

www.infiniti.ca/bluetooth for instructions on

connecting INFINITI recommended cellular

phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by INFINITI and

cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone 䊊

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is connected

and the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Making a call by entering a phone

number

Main Menu

“Call” 䊊

“Phone Number” 䊊

Speak the digits 䊊

“Dial” 䊊

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” 䊊

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊

B. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with

the area code in single digit format 䊊

C.Ifthe

system has trouble recognizing the correct

phone number, try entering the number in

the following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-

ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five

five five” as the 1st group, then “one two

one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than

ten digits or any special characters, say

“Special Number”. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “How to say numbers” in this

section.

5. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and an-

nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” 䊊

D. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional information, refer to “List of voice

commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the button

on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, refer to “List of

voice commands” in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the com-

mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear

the list of commands currently available any time

the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,

you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time

the system is waiting for a response.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-

mand to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to

the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phone

to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System,

press the button.

●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset

to “off” for the next call so the other party

can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without

automatic phonebook download

function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

“Delete Entry” 䊊

“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic down-

load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® pro-

file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-

ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each

phone connected to the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you

would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

For additional information, refer to “How to say

numbers” in this section.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

For additional information, refer to “Transfer en-

try” in this section. The system acknowledges the

command and asks you to initiate the transfer

from the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via the Bluetooth® communication link.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. For additional information, refer to

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You can also

visit www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth or

www.infiniti.ca/bluetooth for instructions on

transferring phone numbers from INFINITI rec-

ommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you

for the next command. When you have finished

entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one

entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-

ognizes the command, speak the name to delete

or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Phonebook” (phones with automatic

phonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

SayaName

“List Names” 䊊

“Record Name” 䊊

For phones that support automatic download of the

phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the

“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries

in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of

an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names for

each phone connected to the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, the

phonebook is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. This feature allows you to access your

phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call

contacts by name. You can record a custom

voice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For additional information,

refer to “Record name” in this section.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session. For

additional information, refer to the “Record name”

in this section.

“Record Name” 䊊

The system allows you to record custom voice

tags for contact names in the phonebook that the

vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can

also be used to record voice tags to directly dial

an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice

tags can be recorded to the system.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” 䊊

“Incoming” 䊊

“Missed” 䊊

“Call Back” 䊊

“Redial” 䊊

Use the Recent Calls command to access out-

going, incoming, missed calls and to call back the

last incoming call or to redial the last outgoing

call.

“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing

calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming

calls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls made to

the vehicle that were not answered.

“Call Back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of

the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to dial the number of

the last outgoing call from the vehicle.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” 䊊

“Select Phone” 䊊

“Replace Phone” 䊊

“Delete Phone” 䊊

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage

the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable

the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” 䊊

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to

the vehicle. For additional information, refer to

“Connecting procedure” in this section.

“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select from a

list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

select. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Replace Phone” 䊊

Use the Replace Phone command to replace an

existing phone pairing with a new phone. The

system will keep all voice tags assigned to your

phonebook.

“Delete Phone” 䊊

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also

delete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent

a wireless connection to your phone.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE

Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect

users to train the system to improve recognition

accuracy. By repeating a number of commands,

the users can create a voice model of their own

voice that is stored in the system. The system is

capable of storing a different voice adaptation

model for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-

ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-

sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the voice

adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END

() button to select a different lan-

guage.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-

guage, refer to “Choosing a language”in this

section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations are

already in use, the system will prompt you to

overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, press the button.

8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will announce that voice adap-

tation has been completed and the system is

ready.

The VA mode will stop if:

●The button is pressed for approxi-

mately 5 seconds in VA mode.

●The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the VA mode, the system instructs the

trainer to say the following phrases. The system

will prompt you for each phrase.

●phonebook transfer entry

●dial three oh four two nine

●delete call back number

●incoming

●transfer entry

●eight pause nine three two pause seven

●delete all entries

●call seven two four zero nine

●phonebook delete entry

●next entry

●dial star two one seven oh

●yes

●no

●select

●missed

●dial eight five six nine two

●Bluetooth on

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●outgoing

●call three one nine oh two

●nine seven pause pause three oh eight

●cancel

●call back number

●call star two zero nine five

●delete phone

●dial eight three zero five one

●record name

●four three pause two nine pause zero

●delete redial number

●phonebook list names

●call eight oh five four one

●correction

●connect phone

●dial seven four oh one eight

●previous entry

●delete

●dial nine seven two six six

●call seven six three oh one

●go back

●call five six two eight zero

●dial six six four three seven

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. This can be especially helpful if the

noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice

recognition system to accurately interpret com-

mands. The manual control mode does not allow

dialing a phone number by digits. The user may

select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent

Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit

the manual control mode by pressing and holding

the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that time,

pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button will

start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

●To enter manual control mode, start the

voice recognition system and tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙when

manual controls are initially activated.

●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

always speak the current menu option. De-

pending on the audio display, it will also

show the current menu option.

●To select the current menu option, press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button.

●To go back to the previous menu, press the

PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current

menu is the Main Menu, pressing the

PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the

Phone system.

●To exit the manual control mode, press and

hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for

5 seconds.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the connected cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

INFINITI Voice Recognition system supports the

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “INFINITI Voice Recognition Sys-

tem” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth or

www.infiniti.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be impos-

sible to receive a call for a short period of

time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●If the hands-free phone system seems to be

malfunctioning, refer to “Troubleshooting

guide” in this section. You can also visit

www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth

www.infiniti.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

●The signal strength display on the monitor

will not coincide with the signal strength

display of some cellular phones.

●If reception between callers is unclear, ad-

justing the incoming or outgoing call volume

may improve the clarity. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Call volume” in this section.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

–

CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s

RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied

antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or

attachments could damage the transmitter and

may violate FCC regulations.

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Clarion.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features

using the INFINITI Voice Recognition system. For

additional information, refer to “INFINITI Voice

Recognition System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-

back to speak the next command by pressing

the button on the steering wheel. After

interrupting the system, wait for a beep before

speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

NOTE:

For US models, voice recognition system

must be in Alternate Command Mode in

order for One Shot Calling to operate. For

additional information, refer to “INFINITI

Voice Recognition Alternate Command

Mode” in this section.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

Press the SETTING button on the control panel,

then touch the “Bluetooth” key on the display.

LHA2152

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® on.

Off Turns Bluetooth® off.

Connect Bluetooth Upon pressing this button, a popup box will appear on the screen, prompting you to confirm that the connection is for the phone system. Touch the

⬙Yes⬙key.

Yes Confirms that you are connecting a Bluetooth® device. Upon pressing this button, the following message will appear on screen. ⬙The system is

searching for your phone. Using your handset, look for a Bluetooth® device called MY-CAR. When requested by the handset, enter the PIN 1234.

Exiting screen cancels search.⬙The connecting procedure phone varies by phone. For additional information, refer to phone Owner’s Manual. When

the connecting is complete, the screen will return to the Bluetooth® settings screen.

Cancel Cancels operation.

No Indicates to the system that you are connecting a Bluetooth® enabled audio device.

Cancel Cancels operation.

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

This vehicle has two phonebooks available for

your use. Depending on your phone, the system

may automatically download your entire cell

phone’s phonebook into the “Handset phone-

book”. For additional information on downloading

your phonebook, refer to “Handset Phonebook”

in this section. If your phonebook does not auto-

matically download, you may set up the vehicle

phonebook with up to 40 entries. This phone-

book allows you to record a name to speak while

using voice recognition.

Press the button on the steering wheel

and then touch the ⬙Vehicle Phonebook⬙key.

Touch the ⬙Add New⬙key at the top of the screen.

This will allow the user to add new phonebook

content via the methods listed below:

Menu Item Result

Copy from Call History The system will show a list of your incoming, outgoing, or missed calls that were downloaded from your cell phone (depending on your

phone’s compatibility). You may select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook.

Copy from the Handset The system will show your cell phone’s phonebook that was downloaded (depending on your phone’s compatibility). You may select one of

these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook.

Enter Number by Keypad Allows manual entry of phonebook contacts

Ok Saves the phonebook entry and then will show a screen that is ready to call the number. Press the BACK button to return to the Vehicle

Phonebook.

Entry # Allows user to choose the entry number

Name Allows user to enter the contact name

Number Allows user to enter the contact number

Type Allows user to choose a type from the icon list

Voicetag Touch the ⬙Voicetag⬙key to record a name to speak when using the Voice Recognition system

Store Touch the ⬙Store⬙key and prepare to speak the name after the tone

OK When the voicetag is successfully saved, select the ⬙OK⬙key to save the phonebook entry.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

Press the button on the steering wheel

and then touch the ⬙Vehicle Phonebook⬙key.

Next, select the desired entry from the displayed

list. Touch the ⬙Edit⬙key.

Menu Item Result

Entry # Changes the displayed number of the selected entry

Name Edit the name of the entry using the keypad displayed on the screen

Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen

Type Select the icon from the icon list

Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags allow easy dialing using the INFINITI Voice Recognition

System. For additional information, refer to ⬙INFINITI Voice Recognition System⬙in this section.

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HANDSET PHONEBOOK

Many phones will support an automatic down-

load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since

this method allows for up to 1,000 numbers to be

stored and entries are automatically assigned

voice tags by the system, this is a useful function

for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni-

tion system.

Transferring the handset phonebook

If your cellular phone supports automatic down-

loading, the system transfers the handset phone-

book automatically by default. To ensure that this

feature is activated, press the SETTING button

on the instrument panel and touch the “Phone”

key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should

have the amber indicator next to the word ON

activated. Touch the “Auto Downloaded” key to

toggle this feature on or off.

To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle

manually, follow these steps:

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Phone” key.

3. Touch the “Download Handset Phonebook”

key.

Once the handset phonebook is transferred to

the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing the

PHONE key on the instrument panel or the

button on the steering wheel, then touching the

“Handset Phonebook” key.

Whether the handset phonebook is transferred

manually or automatically, the process can take

up to 5 minutes to complete, depending on the

size of the handset phonebook. For additional

information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s

manual.

LHA1319

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

MAKING A CALL

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The ⬙Phone⬙screen will appear on the display.

Select one of the following options to make a call:

Menu Item Result

Vehicle Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook. Dialing commences immediately.

Call History Select the name from the incoming or outgoing call history. Dialing commences immediately.

Handset Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the handset phonebook. Dialing commences immediately.

Dial Number Input the phone number manually using the keypad on the screen. It will be necessary to select ⬙OK⬙when finished for dialing to commence. For

additional information on using the touch-screen, refer to ⬙How to use the touch-screen⬙in this section.

Volume & Ringtone For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.

Connect Phone For additional information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.

Connected Phones Select this key to display a list of all connected phones.

LHA1322

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow

one of the procedures listed below:

Menu Item Result

Press the button on the steering

wheel

Accept an incoming call to talk.

⬙Answer⬙key on the display Accept an incoming call to talk.

⬙Hold Call⬙key on the display Put an incoming call on hold.

⬙Reject Call⬙key on the display Reject an incoming call.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

PHONE SETTINGS

To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, press the SET-

TING button on the control panel and touch the

⬙Phone⬙key on the display.

Menu Item Result

Edit Vehicle Phonebook For additional information, refer to ⬙Vehicle phonebook⬙in this section for adding, editing, and deleting contacts in the vehicle phonebook.

Delete Phonebook Delete a phonebook stored on the system.

Download Handset Phonebook For additional information, refer to ⬙Handset phonebook⬙in this section for adding, editing, and deleting contacts in the handset

phonebook.

Volume and Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming call sound and outgoing call sound.

Automatic Hold When this option is turned on, an incoming call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings.

Vehicle Ringtone When this option is turned on, a specific ringtone that is different than the cellular phone’s will sound when receiving a call.

Auto Downloaded For additional information about automatically downloading the handset phonebook, refer to “Handset phonebook” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, press the SET-

TING button on the control panel and touch the

⬙Bluetooth⬙key on the display.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth system on or off.

Connect Bluetooth For additional information about connecting a phone, refer to ⬙Connecting procedure⬙in this section.

Connected Devices Display a list of the Bluetooth devices connected to the system.

Edit Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name, device address, and device PIN.

Replaced Connected Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows you to keep an voicetags that were recorded using the previous

phone.

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CALL VOLUME

Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume

may improve clarity if reception between callers is

unclear. To access the volume settings, press the

SETTING button, then select ”Volume and

Beeps”. You can also adjust the volume of an

incoming voice during a call by pushing the vol-

ume control switch on the steering wheel or by

turning the volume control knob on the control

panel:

Menu Item Result

Ringtone Adjusting this setting allows ringer volume to be set at a desired level.

Incoming Call Adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume (You can also adjust the volume of an incoming voice during a call by

pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob.

Outgoing Call Adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-free

operation of the systems equipped on this ve-

hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.

There are two voice recognition modes of opera-

tion available. They are:

●Standard Mode

●Alternate Command Mode

In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),

commands that are available are always shown

on the display and announced by the system. You

can complete your desired operation by simply

following the prompts given by the system. Not all

INFINITI Voice Recognition options are available

while in Standard Mode.

For advanced operation, you can change to an

Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-

eration of the display and audio system through

INFINITI Voice Recognition. When this mode is

active, an expanded list of commands can be

spoken after pushing the TALK switch on

the steering wheel, and the voice command

menu prompts are turned off.

In Alternate Command Mode the recognition suc-

cess rate may be affected because the number of

available commands and the ways of speaking

each command are increased. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “INFINITI Voice Recognition Alter-

nate Command Mode” in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate when

Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the

Speaker Adaptation Function available in that

mode. For additional information, refer to

“Speaker Adaptation Function” in this section.

Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate

Command Mode be turned off and Standard

Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-

mance.

While using the INFINITI Voice Recognition sys-

tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,

you can switch to using manual controls (touch-

screen, INFINITI controller, steering wheel con-

trols) and the information you have already en-

tered by voice control will be retained. To switch

to manual controls, select the “Manual Controls”

key on the display when it appears. The system

will respond by speaking “Changing to manual

operation. Please use manual controls to con-

tinue.”

For the voice commands for the navigation sys-

tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s

Manual of your vehicle.

For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting

is the Standard Mode. For additional information,

refer to “INFINITI Voice Recognition Standard

Mode” in this section. For vehicles in Canada, the

factory default setting is the Alternate Command

Mode. For additional information, refer to

“INFINITI Voice Recognition Alternate Command

Mode” in this section.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

STANDARD MODE

The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-

tion, phone and vehicle information. With this

setting active, commands that are available are

always shown on the display and announced by

the system.

Displaying user guide

If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition system

for the first time or you do not know how to

operate it, you can display the User Guide for

confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-

tains basic instructions and tutorials for several

voice commands.

1. Press the INFO button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Others” key.

3. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Touch the “User Guide” key.

5. Touch an item.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing

the button and saying “Help” fol-

lowed by “User Guide”.

Menu Item Result

Getting Started The following message will appear: ⬙With voice recognition, you can use voice commands to control navigation, audio, phone, and other

functions. To start the voice recognition system, push the TALK switch on the steering wheel, then say a command after the tone⬙.

Let’s Practice Initiates a practice session that demonstrates how to improve voice recognition by the system. The system will prompt you to say a phone

number. After you say the number, the system will provide feedback to improve voice recognition. When you are ready, push the TALK

switch.

Try again Allows user to repeat the session if improvement is needed.

Done Completes practice session and returns user to the User Guide screen.

Using the Address Book Initiates tutorial for using the Address Book.

Finding a Street Address Initiates tutorial for finding a street address.

Placing Calls Initiates tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation.

Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system: ⬙Say commands when there are minimal background

sounds; Say voice commands clearly; Avoid talking slow or with long pauses; Say commands after the tone⬙.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

Voice recognition settings

The available settings of the INFINITI Voice Rec-

ognition system are described.

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel

2. Touch the ”Others” key

3. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key

You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen

using the INFINITI controller.

Menu Item Result

Command List When Alternate Command Mode is activated, this key will allow user to access the list of Phone, Navigation, Information, Audio, and Help

commands.

User Guide Allows user access to user guide settings. For additional information, refer to “Displaying User Guide” in this section.

Speaker Adaptation When Alternate Command Mode is activated, this key will allow user to initiate a system function for better voice recognition performance. For

additional information, refer to “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this section.

Alternate Command Mode Allows user to activate Alternate Command Mode. A screen will appear prompting user to review the expanded command list and advises that

some command will be replaced and voice menu prompts turned off. User will have to confirm by pressing “OK” to proceed with activation.

Minimize Voice Feedback When Alternate Command Mode is activated, this key will allow user to reduce system voice feedback during voice recognition session.

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. When completed,

the system is ready to accept voice commands. If

the switch is pressed before the initializa-

tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-

cepted. Please wait until the INFINITI Voice Rec-

ognition initialization is completed.

BEFORE STARTING

To get the best recognition performance from

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

●The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to eliminate

the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-

bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the

system from correctly recognizing the voice

commands.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command.

●Speak in a natural conversational voice with-

out pausing between words.

●If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan

speed is automatically lowered so that your

commands can be recognized more easily.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Press the switch located on the steer-

ing wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Would you like

to access Phone, Navigation, Information,

Audio or Help?”

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak

a command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts

and speak after the tone sounds until your

desired operation is completed.

LHA2479 LHA1333

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

Operating tips

●Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the icon

is .

●Commands that are available are always

shown on the display and spoken through

voice menu prompts. Commands other than

those that are displayed are not accepted.

Please follow the prompts given by the sys-

tem.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the

command in a clear voice.

●Say “Back” when prompted to return to the

previous screen.

●If you want to cancel the command, press

and hold the switch. The message,

“Voice Recognition is cancelled” will be an-

nounced.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-

tem feedback, push the volume control

switch on the steering wheel or use the

audio system volume knob while the system

is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires a certain way to

speak numbers when giving voice commands.

Refer to the following examples.

General rule

●Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

●When saying the phone number 800-662-

6200, the system will accept “eight-

hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or

“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also

supported.

Examples

●1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two

zero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six two

zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone num-

bers by saying the phone number in three groups

of numbers. For example, when you try to call

800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and

the system will then ask you for the next 3 digits.

Then, say “six six two”. After recognition, the

system will then ask for the last 4 digits. Say, “six

two zero zero”. Using this method of phone digit

entry can improve recognition performance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak the

number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter

“O” is included in the house number, it will

not be recognized as “0” even if you speak

“oh” instead of “zero”.

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Standard Mode command list

Category Commands

COMMAND ACTION

Phone Displays Phone function commands.

Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.

Information Displays Vehicle Information.

Audio Displays Audio commands.

Call (name) Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either phonebook. Please say “Call” followed by a stored name.

Help Displays user guide (this command is not displayed on the screen).

Phone Commands

COMMAND ACTION

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.

Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.

Call History Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

Navigation Commands

COMMAND ACTION

Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Allows user to set destination address.

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141

Vehicle Information Commands

COMMAND ACTION

Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.

Maintenance Displays Maintenance information.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off.

Where am I? Displays current vehicle location.

Audio Commands

COMMAND ACTION

AM Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.

FM Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.

XM Changes the audio system mode to XM radio.

CD Changes the audio system mode to CD.

4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voice command examples

Some basic voice command examples are de-

scribed here.

For navigation system commands, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone

number 800-662-6200:

1. Press the button located on the steer-

ing wheel.

2. The system announces, “Would you like to

access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-

dio or Help?”

3. Say “Phone”.

4. Say “Dial Number”.

5. Say “800”.

6. The system announces, “Please say the next

3 digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Say “662”.

8. The system announces, “Please say the last

4 digits or say change number.”

9. Say “6200”.

10. The system announces, “Dial or Change

Number?”

11. Say “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

NOTE:

●You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10

continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-

tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-

essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is

recommended for improved recognition. For

additional information, refer to “How to

speak numbers” in this section.

●You can only say a phone number using the

3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using

this command. Please use the “International

Call” command for all other formats, and

when special characters such as star (*),

pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.

LHA2479

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-143

●If you say “Change Number” during phone

number entry, the system will automatically

request that you repeat the number using

the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the

area code first and then follow the prompts.

●Do not add a “1” in front of the area code

when speaking phone numbers.

●If the system does not recognize your com-

mand, please try repeating the command

using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or

too loudly may further decrease recognition

performance.

Example 2 — Placing an international call

to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

1. Press the button located on the steer-

ing wheel.

2. The system announces, “Would you like to

access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-

dio or Help?”

3. Say “Phone”.

4. Say “International Call”.

5. Say “011811112223333”.

6. Say “Dial”.

7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-

222-3333.

NOTE:

Any digit input format is available in the

International Number input process, as

well as the special characters such as star

(*), pound (#), and plus (+).

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE

The Alternate Command Mode enables control of

the audio and display systems as well as addi-

tional commands for the Vehicle Information,

Phone and Navigation systems. With this setting

active, the system does not announce or display

the available commands at each step.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an

expanded list of commands can be used after

pushing the TALK switch. Under this

mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands

is not available on the display. Please review the

expanded command list, available when this

mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-

mands are replaced. Please see examples of

Alternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognition

success rate may be affected as the number of

available commands and ways of speaking each

command are increased. You can turn this mode

ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the

Voice Recognition Settings will change to show

more options.

LHA2479

4-144 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Activating Alternate Command Mode

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Others” key on the display.

3. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Touch the “Alternate Command Mode” key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on

the screen. Touch the “OK” key to activate

the Alternate Command Mode.

6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and

the setting menu is expanded to include the

Alternate Command Mode options. Refer to

“Voice Recognition Settings” in this section

for an explanation of the options.

Displaying the command list

If you are controlling the system by voice com-

mands for the first time or do not know the

appropriate voice command, perform the follow-

ing procedure for displaying the voice command

list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

Press the switch, listen for the tone and

say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-

ing the command list main menu.

Only manual controls such as the touch-screen

can navigate the command list menu.

As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,

you may access the command list using the fol-

lowing steps:

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key using the INFINITI

controller.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition”key using the

INFINITI controller.

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.

4. Select the “Command List” key using the

INFINITI controller.

5. Select a category using the INFINITI control-

ler. The command list for the category se-

lected is shown.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the

INFINITI controller to view the entire list.

7. Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-145

COMMAND ACTION

Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.

North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.

Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.

Zoom In <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a smaller number.

Zoom Out <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a larger number.

Guidance Voice ON/OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.

Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.

Information Command

COMMAND ACTION

Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.

Maintenance Display Maintenance information.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off.

Where am I? Displays the current vehicle location.

Weather Information Displays weather information.

Weather Map Displays the current weather map.

Audio Command

COMMAND ACTION

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.

CD Starts to play a CD.

USB Turns to the USB audio input.

Bluetooth Audio Turns to the Bluetooth® audio system.

AUX Turns to the AUX input.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-147

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. When completed,

the system is ready to accept voice commands. If

the switch is pressed before the initializa-

tion completes, the display will show the mes-

sage: “System not ready” or a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best performance from INFINITI Voice

Recognition, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●When the climate control is in the AUTO

mode, the fan speed decreases automati-

cally for easy recognition.

●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

1. Press and release the button located

on the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Please say a

command from the displayed list or say Help

to show all commands.”

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak

a command.

4. Once a command is recognized, the system

will announce the recognized command and

perform the requested action.

If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the

command in a clear voice after the tone.

LHA2479 LHA2993

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-149

Operating tips

●Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the icon

is .

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the

command in a clear voice.

●Say “Back” when prompted to return to the

previous screen.

●If you want to cancel the command, press

and hold the switch. The message,

“Voice recognition is cancelled” will be an-

nounced.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-

tem feedback, push the volume control

switch on the steering wheel or use the

audio system volume knob while the system

is making an announcement.

●To minimize the amount of prompts spoken

by the system in Alternate Command Mode,

use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.

To access the Minimize Voice Feedback

function press the SETTING button, then

select the “Others” key. Then select the

“Voice Recognition” key.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires a certain way to

speak numbers when giving voice commands.

Refer to the following examples.

General rule

●Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

●When saying the phone number 800-662-

6200, the system will accept “eight-

hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or

“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also

supported.

Examples

●1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two

zero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six two

zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone num-

bers by saying the phone number in three groups

of numbers. For example, when you try to call

800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and

the system will then ask you for the next 3 digits.

Then, say “six six two”. After recognition, the

system will then ask for the last 4 digits. Say, “six

two zero zero”. Using this method of phone digit

entry can improve recognition performance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak the

number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter

“O” is included in the house number, it will

not be recognized as “0” even if you speak

“oh” instead of “zero”.

Settings menu

The content of the Settings Menu differs when

the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.

Command List

Displays the command list for Alternate Com-

mand Mode.

User Guide

The user guide provides basic instructions for

using Voice Recognition and accessing some

voice commands.

NOTE:

The user guide can also be accessed from

within the INFO menu after pressing the

INFO button.

4-150 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Speaker Adaptation

Starts a system training procedure to learn the

specific sounds of your voice. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Speaker adaptation function”

in this section.

Alternate Command Mode

For advanced operation, an Alternate Command

Mode is provided. This setting enables control of

the audio system as well as additional commands

for the Phone and Navigation systems. With this

setting active, the system does not announce or

display the available commands at each step.

When this mode is activated, the Voice Recogni-

tion Settings will change to show more options.

Minimize Voice Feedback

Reduces the amount of the information spoken

for each voice instruction.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION

The Voice Recognition system has a function to

learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition

performance. The system can memorize the

voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Others” key.

3. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Touch the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

5. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-

rized by the system.

6. Select a category to be learned by the sys-

tem from the following list:

●Phone

●Navigation

●Information

●Audio

●Help

The voice commands in the category are

displayed.

7. Select a voice command to train.

The Voice Recognition system starts.

8. The system requests that you repeat a com-

mand after a tone. This command is also

displayed on the screen.

9. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak

the command that the system requested.

10. When the system has recognized the voice

command, the voice of the user is learned.

Press the switch or the BACK button to

return to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command correctly,

the voice command indicator on the screen turns

on.

LHA1341

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-151

Speaker Adaptation function settings

Edit Name

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on

the screen.

Reset Result

Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-

tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can have the

system learn the voice commands in succession,

without selecting commands one by one.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, follow the solutions given in this guide

for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number one,

until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-

NIZED” or the system fails to interpret

the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, refer to “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this

section.

2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

The system consistently selects the

wrong voicetag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

4-152 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-4

Three-way catalyst..............................5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ....................................5-8

Avoiding collision and rollover. . ..................5-8

Off-road recovery...............................5-9

Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-9

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...............5-10

Driving safety precautions ......................5-10

Push-Button Ignition Switch .......................5-12

Operating range...............................5-13

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . .........5-14

Emergency engine shut off .....................5-14

INFINITI Intelligent Key battery discharge .........5-15

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .............5-15

Before starting the engine .........................5-16

Starting the engine ...............................5-16

Remote start (if so equipped) ...................5-17

Driving the vehicle ................................5-17

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ........5-17

Parking brake ....................................5-21

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector ......................5-22

Standard mode................................5-22

Sport mode ...................................5-22

Snow mode...................................5-22

ECO mode ...................................5-23

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-25

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system..........5-26

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system.........5-28

Lane camera unit maintenance ..................5-32

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) System/Blind Spot

Intervention® (BSI) System/Backup Collision

Intervention (BCI) System (if so equipped) ..........5-32

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind

Spot Intervention® (BSI) systems . . .............5-33

BSW system operation ........................5-34

BSI system operation ..........................5-36

BSW/BSI driving situations.....................5-39

The Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)

system .......................................5-44

BCI system description ........................5-44

BCI system precautions ........................5-45

BCI system operation ..........................5-47

Radar maintenance ............................5-50

Cruise control....................................5-51

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-51

Cruise control operations.......................5-51

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

(full speed range) (if so equipped) . . ................5-52

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode..................................5-54

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.........5-54

Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode..................................5-54

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

operation .....................................5-56

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode ........................................5-68

Preview function (for ICC system equipped

models) ......................................5-72

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-72

Precautions on DCA system ....................5-73

DCA operation ................................5-74

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-82

Precautions on FCW system....................5-83

FCW system operation.........................5-84

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-85

Precautions on IBA system .....................5-86

IBA system operation ..........................5-88

Break-in schedule ................................5-88

Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-89

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-90

Intelligent AWD (if so equipped) ...................5-90

Parking/parking on hills............................5-93

Power steering ...................................5-94

Brake system ....................................5-94

Brake precautions .............................5-94

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-95

Brake assist ..................................5-96

Preview Function (Intelligent Cruise Control

system equipped models) ......................5-96

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-98

Active Trace Control (if so equipped) ...........5-100

Brake force distribution .......................5-100

Hill start assist system ...........................5-101

Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) ......5-102

System operation.............................5-103

Cold weather driving.............................5-104

Freeing a frozen door lock .....................5-104

Antifreeze....................................5-104

Battery ......................................5-104

Draining of coolant water ......................5-105

Tire equipment . . .............................5-105

Special winter equipment......................5-105

Driving on snow or ice ........................5-105

Engine block heater (if so equipped)............5-106

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must drive with

one of these open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the liftgate or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted for all four tires. After the tire is

inflated to the recommended pressure, the

vehicle must be driven at speeds above

16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and

turn off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

●The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information display

when the low tire pressure warning light is

illuminated and low tire pressure is detected.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

turns off when the low tire pressure warning

light turns off.

●The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears each time the ignition switch is in

the ON position as long as the low tire

pressure warning light remains illuminated.

●The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS

malfunction.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates, check

the tire pressure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

●You can also check the pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the vehicle infor-

mation display screen. The order of the tire

pressure figures displayed on the screen

corresponds with the actual order of the tire

position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (For additional information,

refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.)

5-6 Starting and driving

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

●The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with tire

chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

●Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception of

the signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator provides visual

and audible signals outside the vehicle to help

you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD

tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift

lever into the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

Do not start the engine.

Starting and driving 5-7

cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if

the loss of control causes the vehicle to

slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under

the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt

as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do

so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or

“blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the

vehicle by following the procedure below. Please

note that this procedure is only a general guide.

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

Starting and driving 5-9

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service to

change the tire. For additional information,

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-

scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-

hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your INFINITI is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-

ter or mud as your INFINITI is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-

hicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less

capable than 4-wheel drive models for rough

road driving and extrication when stuck in deep

snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

●Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surface may cause the AWD warning

message to display and the AWD sys-

tem to automatically switch from the

AWD to the 2WD mode. This could re-

duce the traction. Be especially careful

when towing a trailer. (AWD models)

●Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

5-10 Starting and driving

●Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can

tip over sideways much more easily

than they can forward or backward.

●Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If

you drive down them, you may not be

able to control your speed. If you drive

across them, you may roll over.

●Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

●Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an

accident.

●If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could

tip or roll over. Always back straight

down in R (Reverse) gear and apply

brakes to control your speed.

●Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed.

●Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

●Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as

far forward and as low as possible. Do

not equip the vehicle with tires larger

than specified in this manual. This could

cause your vehicle to roll over.

●Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

●Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

●Always drive with the floor mats in place

as the floor may become hot.

●Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your INFINITI is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with AWD

engaged.

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a AWD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

●When a wheel is off the ground due to

an unlevel surface, do not spin the

wheel excessively.

Starting and driving 5-11

●Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

●If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your INFINITI vehicle has a higher cen-

ter of gravity than a passenger car. The

vehicle is not designed for cornering at

the same speeds as passenger cars.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly

could result in loss of control and/or a

rollover accident.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the front

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

●Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Brake

system” in this section for “Wet

brakes”.

●Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

●Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent maintenance

may be required. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Periodic maintenance”

in the “INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.”

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop when

the ignition switch is pushed three con-

secutive times in quick succession or the

ignition switch is pushed and held for

more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops

while the vehicle is being driven, this

could lead to a crash and serious injury.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-12 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will

illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

●once to change to ACC.

●two times to change to ON.

●three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the

LOCK position when any door is either opened or

closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to OFF until

the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-

ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch

position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF

position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition

switch to start the engine.

LSD2014 LSD2020

Starting and driving 5-13

The operating range of the engine start function

is inside of the vehicle 䊊

●The luggage area is not included in the op-

erating range, but the Intelligent Key may

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-

ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin

or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is

opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories,

such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position after a period

of time under the following conditions:

●all doors are closed.

●shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any

of the following occur:

●any door is opened.

●shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

●ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle

is not running, after some time under the follow-

ing conditions:

●all doors are closed.

●shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any

of the following occur:

●any door is opened.

●shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) posi-

tion.

●ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended pe-

riod. This can discharge the battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when

the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

5-14 Starting and driving

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

DISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged,

or environmental conditions interfere with the

Intelligent Key operation, start the engine accord-

ing to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

After Step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the brake

pedal, the ignition switch position will change to

ACC.

NOTE:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ACC or ON position or the engine is started

by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key

battery discharge indicator appears in the

vehicle information display even when the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent

Key battery discharge indicator, touch the

ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

●If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears, replace the battery as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered key,

it may be due to interference caused by another

registered key, an automated toll road device or

automated payment device on the key ring. Re-

start the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 5 seconds.

3. Repeat Step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-15

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid

as frequently as possible, or at least when-

ever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Check that all doors are closed.

●Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift lever is in any of the driving

positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-

tion switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or

6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the

ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking

the engine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing the

brake pedal and pushing the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-

gine running for a minimum of2-3minutes

before shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time may

make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever into

the P (Park) position and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-16 Starting and driving

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

REMOTE START (if so equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote start require the

ignition switch to be placed in the ON position

before the shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the

ON position, follow the steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Press the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intel-

ligent Key” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in

your vehicle is electronically controlled to pro-

duce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

lever out of the P (Park) position.

This CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed before

shifting from P (Park) to any driving

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of

the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position while the ready light illu-

minates.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift lever to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) position.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while vehicle is moving. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-17

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

Shifting

Press the button 䊊

Awhile depressing the

brake pedal

Press the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pressing 䊊

Abutton

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal, push and press the shift lever button and

move the shift lever from the P (Park) position to

any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is

in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the

vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move the

shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

LSD2019

5-18 Starting and driving

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the shift lever

button pushed in to move the shift lever

from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive po-

sition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate,

the transmission is ready for the manual shift

mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by

moving the shift lever up or down. To cancel

manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D

(Drive) position. The transmission returns to au-

tomatic driving mode.

When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to

the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-

ally. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift

gate, the position indicator displays 1 (first) up to

7 (seventh) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5⇔6⇔7

7 (7th)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

5 (5th) and 6 (6th)

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or

for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine

braking on steep downhill grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than 7th

gear. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up

Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to

higher range.)

When shifting down

Move the shift lever to the ⫺(down) side. (Shifts

to lower range.)

●The transmission will automatically down-

shift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down

between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

●Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode

Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to

return the transmission to the normal driving

mode.

Starting and driving 5-19

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

●When this situation occurs, the CVT

position indicator light will blink and

the chime will sound.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a

higher range than selected if the en-

gine speed is too high. When the ve-

hicle speed decreases, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down and

shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle

comes to a stop.

●CVT operation is limited to automatic drive

mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-

tremely low even if manual shift mode is

selected. This is not a malfunction. When

CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be

selected.

●When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the

shift range may upshift in lower rpm than

usual. This is not a malfunction.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)

position even with the brake pedal depressed

and the shift lever button pushed. To move the

shift lever, perform the following procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover 䊊

Aus-

ing a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release 䊊

Busing a

suitable tool.

5. Press the shift lever button 䊊

Cand move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position 䊊

while holding down the shift lock release.

The vehicle may be moved to the desired

location. Replace the removed shift lock re-

lease cover after the operation. If the shift

lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park)

position, have an INFINITI retailer check the

CVT system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the

P (Park) position while the engine is run-

ning and the brake pedal is depressed, the

stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning

stop lights could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

LSD2022

5-20 Starting and driving

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperatures with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine

power and, under some conditions, vehicle

speed will be decreased automatically to reduce

the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be

limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The MIL may illu-

minate to indicate the fail-safe mode is

activated. For additional information, refer

to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the

“Instrument and controls” section of this

manual. This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and wait for 10 seconds. Then turn

the switch back to the ON position. The

vehicle should return to its normal operat-

ing condition. If it does not return to its

normal operating condition, have an

INFINITI retailer check the transmission

and repair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially careful

when driving. If necessary, pull to the side

of the road at a safe place and allow the

transmission to return to normal opera-

tion, or have it repaired if necessary.

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-21

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it

will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

Four driving modes can be selected by using the

drive mode selector switch, STANDARD,

SPORT, ECO and SNOW.

NOTE:

●When the drive mode select switch selects a

mode, the mode may not switch quickly. This

is not a malfunction.

●Select the STANDARD mode center for nor-

mal driving.

STANDARD MODE

STANDARD MODE is recommended for normal

driving. Turn the drive mode select switch to the

center position. “STANDARD” appears in the ve-

hicle information display for 2 seconds.

SPORT MODE

The SPORT mode adjusts the engine and trans-

mission to enhance performance. Turn the drive

mode select switch to the SPORT position.

“SPORT” appears in the vehicle information dis-

play for 2 seconds.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be

reduced.

SNOW MODE

SNOW mode is used on snowy roads or slippery

areas. When the SNOW mode is activated, en-

gine output is controlled to avoid wheel spin. Turn

the SNOW mode off for normal driving. Turn the

drive mode select switch to the SNOW position.

“SNOW” appears in the vehicle information dis-

play for 2 seconds.

LSD0158

Drive mode select switch

SSD1024

INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR

5-22 Starting and driving

ECO MODE

The ECO mode adjusts the engine and transmis-

sion to enhance fuel economy.

NOTE:

Selecting this drive mode will not necessar-

ily improve fuel economy as many driving

factors influence its effectiveness.

Operation

Turn the drive mode select switch to the ECO

position. “ECO” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display for 2 seconds and the ECO drive

indicator light illuminates on the instrument panel.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed within

the range of economy drive, the ECO drive indi-

cator light illuminates in green. When the accel-

erator pedal is depressed above the range of

economy drive, the color of the ECO drive indi-

cator light changes to orange. For ECO pedal

system equipped models, refer to “ECO pedal

system” in this section.

The ECO drive indicator light will not illuminate in

the following cases:

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

●When the vehicle speed is below 3 MPH

(4.8 km/h) or over 90 MPH (144 km/h).

●When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system (if so equipped) is operated.

ECO pedal system (if so equipped)

The ECO pedal system helps assist the driver to

improve fuel economy by increasing the reaction

force of the accelerator pedal. When the ECO

drive indicator light is blinking or turns off, the

ECO pedal system increases the reaction force

of the accelerator pedal.

ECO drive indicator Illuminate or blink

when

Illuminate

(green)

When the pedal is

depressed within

range of economy

drive

Blinks

(green)

When the pedal

is depressed

likely over the

range of

economy drive

When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in

green, the accelerator reaction force is normal.

When the ECO drive indicator light is blinking or

turns off, the ECO pedal system increases the

reaction force of the accelerator pedal.

The ECO pedal system may not vary accelerator

reaction force under the following conditions:

●When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) or R

(Reverse) position.

●When ICC (if so equipped) is being oper-

ated.

If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The ECO pedal system will

not vary the reaction force of the accelerator

pedal.

When the drive mode select switch is rotated

from the ECO mode to another mode (STAN-

DARD, SPORT or SNOW) while the ECO pedal

system is operating, the ECO pedal system con-

tinues to operate until the pedal is released.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly, the

ECO pedal system will not increase the reaction

force of the acceleration pedal. The ECO pedal

system is not designed to prevent the vehicle

from accelerating.

Starting and driving 5-23

3. To set the reaction force of the ECO pedal

system, select “Standard” or “Soft”.

4. To turn off the ECO pedal system, select

“OFF”, select “ON” and press the ENTER

䊊

2button. When the ECO pedal system is

tuned off, the accelerator will operate nor-

mally.

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system will op-

erate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of

approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above, and

only when the lane markings are clearly visible on

the road.

Each system functions as follows:

●Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system

– warns the driver with a warning light and

chime that the vehicle is beginning to

leave the driving lane.

●Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system

– warns the driver with a warning light and

chime, and helps assist the driver to re-

turn the vehicle to the center of the trav-

eling lane by applying the brakes to the

left or right wheels individually (for a short

period of time).

The LDW and LDP systems monitor the lane

markers on the traveling lane using the camera

unit 䊊

1located above the inside mirror. When the

camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling

close to either the left or the right of the traveling

lane, the Lane Departure Warning indicator light

on the instrument panel blinks in orange and a

warning chime sounds. When the LDP system is

LHA2155 LSD2016

Lane Departure Warning indicator light

LSD2040

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION

(LDP) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-25

on, it will automatically apply the brakes for a

short period of time, using the function of the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING

(LDW) SYSTEM

Precautions on LDW system

WARNING

●This system is only a warning device to

inform the driver of a potential unin-

tended lane departure. It will not steer

the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It

is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in

the traveling lane, and be in control of

the vehicle at all times.

●The system will not operate at speeds

below approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h)

or if it cannot detect lane markers.

●If the LDW system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically, and “Please see

owner’s manual” will appear in the ve-

hicle information display. If “Please see

owner’s manual” appears in the vehicle

information display, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the vehicle.

Place the shift lever into the P (Park)

position and the ignition switch to the

off position and restart the engine. If

“Please see owner’s manual” continues

to appear in the vehicle information dis-

play, have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

●Do not use the LDW system under the

following conditions as it may not func-

tion properly:

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads, such

as on ice or snow, etc.

– When driving on winding or uneven

roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift or tem-

porary lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard

wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

nonoriginal brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

– When you are towing a trailer or

other vehicle.

The system may not function properly under the

following conditions:

●On roads where there are multiple parallel

lane markers; lane markers that are faded or

not painted clearly; yellow painted lane

markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane

markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

●On roads where the discontinued lane mark-

ers are still detectable.

●On roads where there are sharp curves.

5-26 Starting and driving

●On roads where there are sharply contrast-

ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water,

wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after

road repairs. (The LDW system could detect

these items as lane markers.)

●On roads where the traveling lane merges or

separates.

●When the vehicle’s traveling direction does

not align with the lane marker.

●When traveling close to the vehicle in front of

you, which obstructs the lane camera unit

detection range.

●When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to

the windshield in front of the lane camera

unit.

●When the headlights are not bright due to

dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

●When strong light enters the lane camera

unit. (For example, the light directly shines on

the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

●When a sudden change in brightness oc-

curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters

or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

LDW system operation

The LDW system provides a lane departure

warning function when the vehicle is driven at

speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and

above and the lane markings are clear. When the

vehicle approaches either the left or the right side

of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound

and the Lane Departure Warning indicator light

on the instrument panel will blink to alert the

driver.

The warning function will stop when the vehicle

returns inside of the lane markers.

The LDW system is not designed to warn under

the following conditions.

●When you operate the lane change signal

and change traveling lanes in the direction of

the signal. (The LDW system will become

operable again approximately 2 seconds af-

ter the lane change signal is turned off.)

●When the vehicle speed lowers to less than

approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

●When the Blind Spot Intervention® system

activates an audible warning or when the

brakes are automatically applied by the sys-

tem.

After the above conditions have finished and the

necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the

LDW functions will resume.

How to enable/disable the LDW system

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the LDW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance”. Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Driver Aids”, and press the ENTER

button.

Lane Departure Warning indicator light

LSD2040

Starting and driving 5-27

3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the menu

and use the ENTER button to select or

change an item:

●Select “Lane” and press the ENTER but-

ton.

– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER

button to check box for “Warning (LDW)”

– To turn on the assistance system, use the

ENTER button to check box for “Assis-

tance (LDP)”

Temporary disabled status at high

temperature

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under

high temperature conditions (over approximately

104°F (40°C)) and then started, the LDW system

may be deactivated automatically, the warning

systems ON indicator on the switch will flash and

the following message will appear in the vehicle

information display. - “Unavailable High Cabin

Temp. ”

When the interior temperature is reduced, the

LDW system will resume operating automatically

and the warning systems ON indicator will stop

flashing.

LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION

(LDP) SYSTEM

Precautions on LDP system

WARNING

●The LDP system will not always steer

the vehicle to keep it in the lane. It is not

designed to prevent loss of control. It is

the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,

drive safely, keep the vehicle in the trav-

eling lane, and be in control of vehicle at

all times.

●The LDP system is primarily intended

for use on well-developed freeways or

highways. It may not detect the lane

markers in certain roads, weather or

driving conditions.

●Using the LDP system under some con-

ditions of road, lane marker or weather,

or when you change lanes without us-

ing the lane change signal could lead to

an unexpected system operation. In

such conditions, you need to correct the

vehicle’s direction with your steering

operation to avoid accidents.

●When the LDP system is operating,

avoid excessive or sudden steering ma-

neuvers. Otherwise, you could lose con-

trol of the vehicle.

●The LDP system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 45 MPH

(70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane

markers.

●Do not use the LDP system under the

following conditions as it may not func-

tion properly:

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads, such

as on ice or snow, etc.

– When driving on winding or uneven

roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift or tem-

porary lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

5-28 Starting and driving

– When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, non-standard

wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

nonoriginal brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

– When you are towing a trailer or

other vehicle.

●If the LDP system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The LDP system

warning light (orange) will illuminate in

the display.

●If LDP system warning light (orange)

illuminates in the display, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart

the engine. If the LDP system warning

light (orange) continues to illuminate,

have the LDP system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

The LDP system may or may not operate

properly under the following conditions:

●On roads where there are multiple par-

allel lane markers; lane markers that

are faded or not painted clearly; yellow

painted lane markers; non-standard

lane markers; or lane markers covered

with water, dirt, snow, etc.

●On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

●On roads where there are sharp curves.

●On roads where there are sharply con-

trasting objects, such as shadows,

snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines

remaining after road repairs. (The LDP

system could detect these items as lane

markers.)

●On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

●When the vehicle’s traveling direction

does not align with the lane marker.

●When traveling close to the vehicle in

front of you, which obstructs the lane

camera unit detection range.

●When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the

windshield in front of the lane camera

unit.

●When the headlights are not bright due

to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not

adjusted properly.

●When strong light enters the lane cam-

era unit. (For example, the light directly

shines on the front of the vehicle at

sunrise or sunset.)

●When a sudden change in brightness

occurs. (For example, when the vehicle

enters or exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

While the LDP system is operating, you may hear

a sound of brake operation. This is normal and

indicates that the LDP system is operating prop-

erly.

Starting and driving 5-29

LDP system operation

The LDP system operates above approximately

45 MPH (70 km/h). When the vehicle ap-

proaches either the left or the right side of the

traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the

LDW indicator light (orange) on the instrument

panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the LDP

system will automatically apply the brakes for a

short period of time to help assist the driver to

return the vehicle to the center of the traveling

lane.

The warning and assist functions will stop when

the vehicle returns to a position inside of the lane

marker.

To turn on the LDP system, push the dynamic

driver assistance switch on the steering wheel

after starting the engine. The LDW indicator light

(green) on the instrument panel will illuminate.

Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again

to turn off the LDP system. The LDP/Warning

indicator light will turn off.

How to enable/disable the LDP system

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the LDP system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance”. Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Driver Aids”, and press the ENTER

button.

3. To set the LDP system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the menu

and use the ENTER button to select or

change an item:

●Select “Lane” and press the ENTER but-

ton.

– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER

button to check box for Warning (LDW)”

– To turn on the assistance system, use the

ENTER button to check box for “Assis-

tance (LDP)”

LDP ON indicator light/Warning light

(orange)

LSD2041

Dynamic driver assistance switch

LSD2039

5-30 Starting and driving

Automatic deactivation

Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the LDP

system are not designed to work under the fol-

lowing conditions:

●When you operate the lane change signal

and change the traveling lanes in the direc-

tion of the signal. (The LDP system will be

deactivated for approximately 2 seconds af-

ter the lane change signal is turned off.)

●When the vehicle speed lowers to less than

approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the

necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the

warning and assist functions will resume.

Condition B:

The assist function of the LDP system is not

designed to work under the following conditions

(warning is still functional):

●When the brake pedal is depressed.

●When the steering wheel is turned as far as

necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.

●When the vehicle is accelerated during LDP

system operation.

●When the ICC approach warning occurs.

●When the hazard warning flashers are oper-

ated.

●When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished and the

necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the

LDP system application of the brakes will resume.

Condition C:

If the following messages appear in the vehicle

information display, a chime will sound and the

LDP system will be turned off automatically.

●“Unavailable Road is slippery”:

When the VDC system (except TCS func-

tion) or ABS operates.

●“Unavailable VDC OFF”:

When the VDC system is turned off.

●“Unavailable Snow mode active”:

When the drive mode select switch is turned

to the SNOW mode.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, turn

off the LDP system. Push the dynamic driver

assistance switch again to turn the LDP system

back on.

Temporary disabled status at high tem-

perature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under

high temperature conditions (over approximately

104°F (40°C)) and then the LDP system is turned

on, the LDP system may be deactivated auto-

matically and the following message will appear

on the vehicle information display. “Unavailable

High Cabin Temp.” When the interior tempera-

ture is reduced, the system will resume operating

automatically.

Starting and driving 5-31

LANE CAMERA UNIT

MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit 䊊

1for the LDW/LDP sys-

tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep

the proper operation of the LDW/ LDP systems

and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to

observe the following:

●Always keep the windshield clean.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

camera unit.

●Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability of

detecting the lane markers.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove the screw located on the

camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged

due to an accident, contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

This section contains the information about the

following systems:

●Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (if so

equipped)

●Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) system (if so

equipped)

●Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) system

(if so equipped)

WARNING

●The BSW and BSI systems are not a

replacement for proper driving proce-

dure and is not designed to prevent

contact with vehicles or objects. When

changing lanes, always use the side and

rear mirrors and turn and look in the

direction you will move to ensure it is

safe to change lanes. Never rely solely

on the BSW or BSI system.

●There is a limitation to the detection

capability of the radar or the sonar. Not

every moving object or vehicle will be

detected. Using the BSW, BSI and BCI

systems under some road, ground, lane

marker, traffic or weather conditions

could lead to improper system opera-

tion. Always rely on your own operation

to avoid accidents.

SSD0453

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM/BLIND SPOT

INTERVENTION® (BSI) SYSTEM/BACKUP COLLISION

INTERVENTION (BCI) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-32 Starting and driving

●The BSW system operates above ap-

proximately 20 mph (32 km/h).

●The BSI system operates above ap-

proximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

SYSTEM/BLIND SPOT

INTERVENTION® (BSI) SYSTEMS

The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind Spot

Intervention® (BSI) systems can help alert the

driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

2in-

stalled near the rear bumper to detect other ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. In addition to the radar

sensors, the BSI system uses a camera 䊊

1in-

stalled behind the windshield to monitor the lane

markers of your traveling lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either

side of your vehicle within the detection zone

shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts

from the outside mirror of your vehicle and ex-

tends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) side-

ways.

The BSW system operates above approximately

20 MPH (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect

vehicles in the detection zone, the Blind Spot

Warning indicator light illuminates. If the driver

then activates the turn signal, a chime will sound

twice and the Blind Spot Warning indicator light

will flash.

LSD2153

Detection zone

SSD1030

Starting and driving 5-33

The BSI system operates above approximately

37 MPH (60 km/h). If the system detects a ve-

hicle in the detection zone and your vehicle is

approaching the lane marker, the BSI system

provides an audible warning (three times),

flashes the Blind Spot Warning indicator light

and slightly applies the brakes for a short period

of time on one side to help return the vehicle back

to the traveling lane. The BSI system provides an

audible warning and turns on or flashes the Blind

Spot Warning indicator light even if the BSW

system is off.

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detec-

tion zone, the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indica-

tor light located by the outside mirrors illumi-

nates. If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the BSW indicator

light flashes. The BSW indicator light continues

to flash until the detected vehicles leave the

detection zone.

The BSW indicator light illuminates for a few

seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

The brightness of the BSW indicator light is

adjusted automatically depending on the bright-

ness of the ambient light.

A chime sounds if the radar sensors have already

detected vehicles when the driver activates the

turn signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection

zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then

only the BSW indicator light flashes and no

chime sounds. For additional information, refer to

“BSW/BSI driving situations” in this section.

The BSW system automatically turns on every

time the engine is started, as long as it is acti-

vated using the settings menu on the vehicle

information display.

BSW indicator light

LSD2053

5-34 Starting and driving

When the warning systems switch is turned off,

the indicator 䊊

1on the switch is off. The indicator

will also be off if the BSW, the Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) and the Forward Collision Warn-

ing (FCW) systems are deactivated.

How to enable/disable the BSW

system

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance”. Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Driver Aids”, and press the ENTER

button.

3. To set the BSW system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the menu

and use the ENTER button to select or

change an item:

●Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER

button to check box for “Warning (BSW)”

– To turn on the assistance system, use the

ENTER button to check box for “Assis-

tance (BSI)”

– Use the ENTER button to toggle through

the brightness choices —

“Bright/STD/Dark”

BSW temporarily not available

When the “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction”

message appears in the vehicle information dis-

play, a chime will sound, the warning systems

switch indicator will blink and the BSW system

will be not available.

When the above condition no longer exists, the

BSW system will resume automatically. For addi-

tional information, refer to “BSW malfunction” in

this section.

BSW malfunction

When the BSW system malfunctions, the system

will turn off automatically, a chime will sound and

“Please see owner’s manual” will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

LSD2015

Starting and driving 5-35

BSI SYSTEM OPERATION

If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the detec-

tion zone, the Blind Spot Warning indicator light

located near the outside mirrors illuminates. If

your vehicle is approaching a lane marker, the

system chimes a sound (three times) and the

Blind Spot Warning indicator light flashes. Then

the system applies the brakes on one side of the

vehicle for a moment to help return the vehicle

back to the center of the lane. BSI operates

regardless of turn signal usage.

NOTE:

Warning and system application of the

brakes will only be activated if the Blind

Spot Warning indicator light is already illu-

minated when your vehicle approaches a

lane marker. If another vehicle comes into

the detection zone after your vehicle has

crossed a lane marker, no warning or brake

application will be activated. For additional

information, refer to “BSW/BSI driving

situations” in this section. The BSI system

is typically activated earlier than the Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system when

your vehicle is approaching a lane marker.

LSD2053 LSD2154

5-36 Starting and driving

The BSI system turns on when the dynamic driver

assistance switch on the steering wheel is

pushed when the “Blind Spot Intervention” is

enabled in the settings menu on the vehicle infor-

mation display. The BSI ON indicator light on the

instrument panel illuminates when the BSI sys-

tem is turned on.

The BSI system provides a chime and turns on or

flashes the Blind Spot Warning indicator light

even if the BSW system is off.

How to enable/disable the BSI system

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the BSI system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance”. Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Driver Aids”, and press the ENTER

button.

3. To set the BSI system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the menu

and use the ENTER button to select or

change an item:

●Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER

button to check box for “Warning (BSW)”

– To turn on the assistance system, use the

ENTER button to check box for “Assis-

tance (BSI)”

– Use the ENTER button to toggle through

the brightness choices —

“Bright/STD/Dark”

BSI temporarily not available

When any of the following messages appear on

the vehicle information display, a chime will sound

and the BSI system will be turned off automati-

cally.

●“Unavailable Road is slippery” :

When the VDC system (except traction con-

trol system function) or ABS operates.

●“Unavailable VDC OFF” :

When the VDC system is turned off.

●“Unavailable Snow mode active” :

When the drive mode select switch is turned

to the SNOW mode.

●“Unavailable High Cabin Temp. ” :

When the camera detects that the interior

temperature is high (over approximately

104°F (40°C)).

●“Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction” :

When side radar blockage is detected.

Turn off the BSI system and turn it on again when

the above conditions no longer exist.

BSI malfunction

When the BSI system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will sound and

the BSI system warning light (orange) will illumi-

nate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the warning light (or-

ange) continues to illuminate, have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SSD0938

Starting and driving 5-37

BSW/BSI system precautions

WARNING

●The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW/BSI when cer-

tain objects are present such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, or animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground clear-

ance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop. For additional information, re-

fer to “BSW/BSI driving situations”

in this section.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “BSW/BSI driv-

ing situations” in this section.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind. For additional information,

refer to “BSW/BSI driving situa-

tions” in this section.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “BSW/BSI driving situ-

ations” in this section.

– A vehicle that passes through the de-

tection zone quickly.

●The radar sensors detection zone is de-

signed based on a standard lane width.

When driving in a wider lane, the radar

sensors may not detect vehicles in an

adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow

lane, the radar sensors may detect ve-

hicles driving two lanes away.

●The radar sensors are designed to ig-

nore most stationary objects, however

objects such as guardrails, walls, foli-

age and parked vehicles may occasion-

ally be detected. This is a normal driving

condition.

●Severe weather or road spray condi-

tions may reduce the ability of the radar

to detect other vehicles.

●The camera may not detect lane mark-

ers in the following situations and the

BSI system may not operate properly.

– On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane markers

that are faded or not painted clearly;

yellow painted lane markers; non-

standard lane markers; lane markers

covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

– On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

– On roads where there are sharp

curves.

– On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shad-

ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams

or lines remaining after road repairs.

– On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

markers.

– When traveling close to the vehicle in

front of you, which obstructs the lane

camera unit detection range.

– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to

the windshield in front of a lane cam-

era unit.

5-38 Starting and driving

– When the headlights are not bright

due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is

not adjusted properly.

– When strong light enters a lane cam-

era unit. (For example: light directly

shines on the front of the vehicle at

sunrise or sunset.)

– When a sudden change in brightness

occurs. (For example: when the ve-

hicle enters or exits a tunnel or under

a bridge.)

●Do not use the BSI system under the

following conditions because the sys-

tem may not function properly.

– During bad weather (For example:

rain, fog, snow, etc.)

– When driving on slippery roads, such

as on ice or snow, etc.

– When driving on winding or uneven

roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

– When driving with a tire that is not

within normal tire conditions (e.g.

tire wear, low tire pressure, installa-

tion of spare tire, tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

●Do not use the BSI systems when tow-

ing a trailer.

●Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will inter-

fere with the chime sound, and it may

not be heard.

BSW/BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The Blind Spot Warning indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling much

faster than your vehicle, the indicator light may not

illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside

your vehicle. Always use the side and rear mirrors

and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will

move to ensure it is safe to change lanes.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

SSD1026

Starting and driving 5-39

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal

then the system chimes a sound (twice) and the

Blind Spot Warning indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before

a vehicle enters the detection zone, the

Blind Spot Warning indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

Illustration 3: If the BSI system is on and your

vehicle is approaching a lane marker and a ve-

hicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes

a sound (three times), and the Blind Spot Warn-

ing indicator light flashes. Then the BSI system

slightly applies the brakes on one side to help

return the vehicle back to the center of the driving

lane.

NOTE:

Illustration 4: If you accelerate from a stop

with a vehicle in the detection zone, the

other vehicle may not be detected.

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

SSD1031

Illustration 3 – Approaching from behind

LSD2048

Illustration 4 – Accelerate from a stop

SSD1032

5-40 Starting and driving

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 5: The Blind Spot Warning indicator

light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The radar sensors may not detect slower moving

vehicles if they are passed quickly.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal

while another vehicle is in the detection zone,

then the system chimes a sound (twice) and the

Blind Spot Warning indicator light flashes.

Illustration 7: If the BSI system is on and your

vehicle approaches a lane marker while another

vehicle is in the detection zone the system

chimes a sound (three times) and the Blind Spot

Warning indicator light flashes. Then, the BSI

system slightly applies the brakes on the appro-

priate side to help return the vehicle back to the

center of the driving lane.

Illustration 5 – Overtaking another vehicle

SSD1033

Illustration 6 – Overtaking another vehicle

SSD1034

Illustration 7 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2072

Starting and driving 5-41

NOTE:

Illustration 8: When overtaking several ve-

hicles in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they are

traveling close together.

Entering from the side

Illustration 9: The Blind Spot Warning indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from either side.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is traveling at about the same speed

as your vehicle when it enters the detection

zone.

Illustration 10: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the Blind Spot Warning indicator light

flashes and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before

a vehicle enters the detection zone, the

Blind Spot Warning indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when another ve-

hicle is detected.

Illustration 8 – Overtaking several vehicles

SSD1036

Illustration 9 – Entering from the side

LSD2050

5-42 Starting and driving

Illustration 11: If the BSI system is on and your

vehicle approaches the lane marker while another

vehicle is in the detection zone, the Blind Spot

Warning indicator light flashes and a chime will

sound three times. Then, the BSI system slightly

applies the brakes on the appropriate side to help

return the vehicle back to the center of the driving

lane.

NOTE:

●Illustration 12: The BSI system will not oper-

ate if your vehicle is on a lane marker when

another vehicle enters the detection zone. In

this case, only the BSW system operates.

●BSI braking will not operate or will stop

operating and only a warning chime will

sound under the following conditions:

– When the brake pedal is depressed.

– When the vehicle is accelerated during

BSI system operation.

– When steering quickly.

– When the ICC, DCA, FCW or IBA warn-

ings sound.

– When the hazard warning flashers are

operated.

– When driving on a curve at a high speed.

Illustration 10 – Entering from the side

SSD1038

Illustration 11 – Entering from the side

SSD1094

Illustration 12 – Entering from the side

LSD2051

Starting and driving 5-43

THE BACKUP COLLISION

INTERVENTION (BCI) SYSTEM

WARNING

●The BCI system is not a replacement for

proper driving procedure, is not de-

signed to prevent contact with vehicles

or objects and does not provide full

brake power. When backing out of park-

ing space, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direc-

tion you will move. Never rely solely on

the BCI system.

●There is a limitation to the detection

capability of the radar or the sonar. Us-

ing the BCI systems under some road,

ground, lane marker, traffic or weather

conditions could lead to improper sys-

tem operation. Always rely on your own

operation to avoid accidents.

BCI SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The BCI systems can help alert the driver of an

approaching vehicle or objects behind the ve-

hicle when the driver is backing out of a parking

space.

When the shift position is R (Reverse) and the

vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 MPH

(8 km/h), the BCI system operates. The BCI system uses radar sensors 䊊

1installed

on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an

approaching vehicle and sonar sensors to detect

objects in the rear.

The radar sensors 䊊

1detect an approaching

vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft. (15 m)

away. The sonar sensors 䊊

2detect stationary

objects behind the vehicle up to approximately

4.9 ft (1.5 m) 䊊

LSD2025 LSD2026

5-44 Starting and driving

If the radar detects a vehicle approaching from

the side or the sonar detects close stationary

objects behind the vehicle, the system gives vi-

sual and audible warnings. If the driver does not

apply the brakes, the system automatically ap-

plies the brake for a moment when the vehicle is

moving backwards. After the automatic brake

application, the driver must depress the brake

pedal to maintain brake pressure. If the driver’s

foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system

pushes the accelerator upward before applying

the brake. If you continue to press the accelera-

tor, the system will not engage the brake.

BCI SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS

LSD2042

LSD2173

Starting and driving 5-45

WARNING

●Always check surroundings and turn to

check what is behind you before back-

ing up. The radar sensors detect ap-

proaching (moving) vehicles. The radar

sensors cannot detect every object such

as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately 24 km/h

(15 MPH)

●The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked

next to you obstructs the beam of the

radar sensor.

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approaching

vehicle turns into your vehicle’s park-

ing lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle formed

by your vehicle and approaching ve-

hicle is small.

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice build up on the vehicle

– Frost build up on the vehicle

– Dirt up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

●The sonar sensors detect stationary ob-

jects behind the vehicle. The sonar sen-

sor may not detect:

– Small or moving objects

– Wedge-shaped objects

– Object close to the bumper (less than

approximately 30 cm (1 ft.))

– Thin objects such as rope, wire and

chain, etc.

●The brake engagement by the BCI sys-

tem is not as effective on a slope as it is

on flat ground. When on a steep slope

the system may not function properly.

●Do not use the BCI system under the

following conditions because the sys-

tem may not function properly.

– When driving with a tire that is not

within normal tire conditions (e.g.

tire wear, low tire pressure, installa-

tion of spare tire, tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

●Do not use the BCI systems when tow-

ing a trailer.

●Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will inter-

fere with the chime sound, and it may

not be heard.

5-46 Starting and driving

WARNING

●As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive or

absent-minded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal, depend-

ing on the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circumstances in

order to maintain a safe distance be-

tween vehicles.

●If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges that

the vehicle has come to a standstill and

sound a warning chime. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver must

depress the brake pedal.

●The system may not detect the vehicle

in front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never

use the ICC system under the following

conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or

there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on

ice or snow.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

bumper around the distance sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle

may go beyond the set vehicle speed

and frequent braking may result in

overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it diffi-

cult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of frequent

acceleration or deceleration

●Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

●In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. You may

need to control the distance from other

vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Al-

ways stay alert and avoid using the ICC

system where not recommended in this

warning section.

Starting and driving 5-55

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of the ve-

hicle and be ready to manually control the proper

following distance. The vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode of the ICC system may not be

able to maintain the selected distance between

vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle

speed under some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

uses a sensor 䊊

Alocated behind the front bum-

per of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling

ahead. The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the

sensor cannot detect the reflection from the ve-

hicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the

selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the

sensor cannot detect the signals:

●When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

●When excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or the luggage room of your

vehicle

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation within the limitation

of the system. When the front bumper area

around the distance sensor is obstructed, the

system will automatically cancel. If the front bum-

per area around the distance sensor is covered

with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In

these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode may not cancel and may not be able

to maintain the selected following distance from

the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the

front bumper area around the distance sensor

regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is

designed to maintain a selected distance and

reduce the speed to match the slower vehicle

ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as

necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. How-

ever, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of

the vehicle’s total braking power. This system

should only be used when traffic conditions allow

vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when

vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle

moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle

traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance

between vehicles may become closer because

the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will

sound a warning chime and blink the system

display to notify the driver to take necessary

action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will

sound if the speed is below approximately

15 MPH (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected

ahead. The system will also disengage when the

vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.

For additional information, refer to “Approach

warning” in this section.

LSD2098

5-56 Starting and driving

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A

vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode

to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle

ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detec-

tion zone due to its position within the same lane

of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the

same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from

the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is enter-

ing the lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If

this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have to

manually control the proper distance away

from the vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0252

5-58 Starting and driving

When driving on some roads, such as winding,

hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are

under construction, the ICC sensor may detect

vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the

vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling

position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If

this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and

approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the

ICC will adjust the speed to maintain the dis-

tance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle

ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits

the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and

maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to maintain con-

trol of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set

speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on

winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have

to manually control the vehicle speed.

SSD0253 SSD0254

Starting and driving 5-59

ICC switch

The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. ACCEL/RES switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed in-

crementally.

2. COAST/SET switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed

incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the

set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

●Long

●Middle

●Short

5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

ICC system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer

and tachometer.

1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:

Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front

of you.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between ve-

hicles set with the distance switch.

LSD2056 LSD2119

5-60 Starting and driving

4. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

5. Intelligent Cruise Control system warning

light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in

the ICC system.

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊

Aon.

The cruise indicator light, set distance indicator

and set vehicle speed indicator come on in a

standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET

switch and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection

indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle

speed indicator 䊊

Bwill come on.) Take your foot

off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-

tain the set speed.

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under

the following conditions, the system cannot be

set and the ICC indicators will flash for a period of

time:

●When traveling below 20 MPH (32 km/h)

and the vehicle ahead is not detected

LSD2120 LSD2125

Starting and driving 5-61

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When the brakes are operated by the driver

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under

the following conditions, the system cannot be

set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will

pop up.

●When the SNOW mode switch is ON (To

use the ICC system, turn off the SNOW

mode switch, push the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch to turn off the ICC and reset the ICC

switch by pressing the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch again.) For additional information

about the SNOW mode switch, refer to

“Snow mode” in this section.

●When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC

system, turn on the VDC system. Push the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC

system and reset the ICC switch by pushing

the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)

For additional information about the VDC

system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in this section.

●When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is

operating

●When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no longer

slipping. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

to turn off the ICC, and reset the ICC system

by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

again.)

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle ahead

LSD2122

5-62 Starting and driving

System operation

WARNING

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle

according to the speed of the vehicle

ahead. Depress the accelerator to prop-

erly accelerate your vehicle when accel-

eration is required for a lane change. De-

press the brake pedal when deceleration

is required to maintain a safe distance to

the vehicle ahead due to its sudden brak-

ing or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert

when using the ICC system.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based

on the road conditions. The ICC system main-

tains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard

cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in

the lane ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the

ICC system decelerates the vehicle by control-

ling the throttle and applying the brakes to match

the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system

then controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver

selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on when

braking is performed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC

system will also display the set speed and se-

lected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the

ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to

resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC

system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle

ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to

the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system

is in operation, the system controls the distance

to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the system will

be canceled.

When passing another vehicle, the set speed

indicator 䊊

Bwill flash when the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indi-

cator will turn off when the area ahead of the

vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the

vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC

system, you can depress the accelerator pedal

when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle

rapidly.

LSD2123

Starting and driving 5-63

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of these

methods:

●Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

●Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

●Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

ICC indicators will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. The

set vehicle speed will increase by approxi-

mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

●Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will increase by approximately 1 MPH

(1 km/h for Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. The

set vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

●Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by approximately 1 MPH

(1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 20 MPH (32 km/h).

How to change the set distance to the

vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be se-

lected at any time depending on the traffic con-

ditions.

Each time the distance switch 䊊

Ais pushed, the

set distance will change to long, average, short

and back to long again, in that sequence.

LSD2061

5-64 Starting and driving

Sensor maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system 䊊

Ais located

behind the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

●Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sensor

area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

●Do not attach metallic objects near the sen-

sor area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause

failure or malfunction.

●Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bum-

per. Before customizing or restoring the

front bumper, please contact an INFINITI

retailer.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed between 25

to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping

your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

●In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, a warning chime does not

sound to warn you if you are too close

to the vehicle ahead, as neither the

presence of the vehicle ahead nor the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

●Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could occur.

●Always confirm the setting in the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control system display.

●Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

– when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

– in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed

– on winding or hilly roads

– on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

– in very windy areas

●Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

LSD2098

5-68 Starting and driving

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switch

1. ACCEL/RES switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed in-

crementally.

2. COAST/SET switch:

Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

4. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the

set speed.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer

and tachometer.

1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:

Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

is on.

2. Cruise set switch indicator:

Displays while the vehicle speed is con-

trolled by the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode of the ICC system.

LSD2064 LSD2075

Starting and driving 5-69

3. Cruise system warning light:

Comes on if there is a malfunction in the

cruise control system.

Operating conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊

Afor longer than

about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch on,

the ICC system display and the CRUISE indica-

tor are displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play. After you hold the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC

system display goes out. The CRUISE indicator

stays lit. You can now set your desired cruising

speed. Pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

again will turn the system completely off.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position, the system is also automatically turned

off. To use the ICC again, quickly push and re-

lease the CRUISE ON/OFF switch (vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold

it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn

it on.

When the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

is on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode cannot be turned on even though the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch is pushed and held.

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, turn off the DCA system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Distance Control As-

sist (DCA) system” in this section.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con-

trol, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch

off when not using the Intelligent Cruise

Control.

LSD2076

5-70 Starting and driving

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET

switch and release it. (The SET indicator will

come on in the display.) Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following three methods:

1. Push the CANCEL button. The SET indica-

tor will go out.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator will

go out.

3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. Both

the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will

go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

2. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/ RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Automatic cancellation

Under the following conditions, a chime will

sound and the system control is automatically

canceled:

●When the vehicle slows down more than

8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed

●When the vehicle speed falls below approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When the VDC (including the TCS) oper-

ates

●When a wheel slips

LSD2066

Starting and driving 5-71

Warning light

When the system is not operating properly, the

chime sounds and the system warning light (or-

ange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a

safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine,

resume driving and then perform the setting

again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the system is

malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still

driveable under normal conditions, have

the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (for ICC

system equipped models)

The ICC system with the Preview Function iden-

tifies the need to apply emergency braking by

sensing the vehicle ahead in the same lane and

the distance to the vehicle ahead and relative

speed from it. It applies the brake pre-pressure

before the driver depresses the brake pedal and

helps improve brake response by reducing pedal

free play.

For additional information, refer to “Brake assist”

in this section.

The (DCA) system brakes and moves the accel-

erator pedal upward according to the distance

from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead

to help assist the driver to maintain a following

distance.

WARNING

●DCA helps maintain a distance to the

vehicle in front under certain condi-

tions. It is not a collision avoidance sys-

tem. Failure to apply the brakes could

result in an accident.

●Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the DCA system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the DCA system.

Do not use the DCA system except in

appropriate road and traffic conditions.

●If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges that

the vehicle has come to a standstill with

a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle

from moving, the driver must depress

the brake pedal.

●The DCA system will not apply brake

control while the driver’s foot is on the

accelerator pedal.

LSD2067

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-72 Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON DCA SYSTEM

The system is intended to assist the driver to

maintain an appropriate following distance from

the vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane and

direction.

The distance sensor is located behind the front

bumper 䊊

A. If the distance sensor 䊊

Adetects a

slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will

reduce the vehicle speed to help assist the driver

to maintain an appropriate following distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle

and applies the brakes (up to 40% of vehicle

braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 490 ft (150 m) ahead.

WARNING

●This system is only an aid to assist the

driver and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

●This system will not adapt automatically

to road conditions.

The distance sensor will not detect the following

objects:

●Stationary and slow moving vehicles

●Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

●Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

WARNING

●As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the DCA system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive or

absent-minded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal, depend-

ing on the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circumstances in

order to maintain a safe distance be-

tween vehicles.

●The system may not detect the vehicle

in front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never

use the DCA system under the following

conditions:

– On roads with sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on

ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

sensor area of the front bumper

LSD2098

Starting and driving 5-73

– On steep downhill roads (frequent

braking may result in overheating the

brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

●Do not use the DCA system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

●In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. You may

need to control the distance from other

vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Al-

ways stay alert and avoid using the DCA

system where not recommended in this

warning section.

DCA OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of the ve-

hicle and be ready to manually decelerate to

maintain the proper following distance. The DCA

system may not be able to decelerate the vehicle

under some circumstances.

The DCA system uses a sensor 䊊

Alocated be-

hind the front bumper of the vehicle to detect

vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor generally

detects the signals returned from the vehicle

ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the

reflection from the vehicle ahead, the DCA sys-

tem may not operate.

The following are some conditions in which the

sensor cannot detect the signals:

●When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is

covered with dirt, snow and road spray

●When dense exhaust or other smoke (black

smoke) from vehicles reduces the sensor’s

detection

●When excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or the luggage room of your

vehicle

The DCA system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation. When the front

bumper area around the distance sensor is cov-

ered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will

automatically cancel. If the front bumper area of

the distance sensor is covered with ice, a trans-

parent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the DCA

system may not detect them. In these instances,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may

not cancel and may not be able to maintain the

selected following distance from the vehicle

ahead. Be sure to check and clean the front

bumper area around the distance sensor regu-

larly.

The DCA system is designed to help assist the

driver to maintain a following distance from the

vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate as nec-

essary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

LSD2098

5-74 Starting and driving

When driving on some roads, such as winding,

hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are

under construction, the sensor may detect ve-

hicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling

position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If

this occurs, the system may warn you by

blinking the system indicator and sounding

the chime unexpectedly. You will have to

manually control the proper distance away

from the vehicle traveling ahead.

DCA system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer

and tachometer.

1. DCA system switch indicator:

Indicates that the dynamic driver assistance

switch is on.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front

of you.

DCA Detection Zones On Winding Roads

SSD0253

DCA Indicators

LSD2068

5-76 Starting and driving

To turn on the DCA system, push the dynamic

driver assistance switch 䊊

1on the steering wheel

after starting the engine. The DCA system switch

indicator light 䊊

2in the vehicle information dis-

play will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver as-

sistance switch again to turn off the DCA system.

The DCA system switch indicator light will turn

off.

The system will start to operate after the vehicle

speed becomes above approximately 3 MPH

(5 km/h).

The dynamic driver assistance switch is used for

the LDP, DCA and BCI systems. When the dy-

namic driver assistance switch is pushed, the

LDP system will also turn on or off simultaneously.

The DCA system can be individually set to on or

off on the display. If the system is set to off, the

system will not turn on even if the dynamic driver

assistance switch is pushed to on. To set the

system to on or off on the display, refer to “Setting

DCA system to ON/OFF” in this section.

Setting DCA system to ON/OFF:

The DCA can be turned on/off in the vehicle

information display using the buttons on the

steering wheel.

1. Press the button, and select the “Set-

tings” using the button. Then press

the ENTER button.

2. Select the “Driver Aids”, and press the EN-

TER button.

3. Select “Forward”, and press the ENTER but-

ton.

4. To turn on the “Assistance (DCA)” check the

box using the ENTER button.

If the LDP, BSI and DCA systems are set to off on

the information display and the dynamic driver

assistance switch is pushed, the LDP ON indica-

tor light, BSI ON indicator light, and the DCA

system switch indicator light will blink for approxi-

mately 2 seconds.

For additional information on LDP and BSI, refer

to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system (if so

equipped)” and “Blind Spot Warning

(BSW)/Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) systems”

in this section.

Under the following conditions, the DCA system

will not operate and the DCA cancellation mes-

sage will pop up:

●When the SNOW mode switch is ON (To

use the DCA system, turn off the SNOW

mode switch, then turn on the dynamic driver

assistance switch.)

LIC2889 LSD2069

Starting and driving 5-77

The stoplights of the vehicle come on when

braking is performed by the DCA system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

WARNING

●When the vehicle ahead detection indi-

cator light is not illuminated, the system

will not control or warn the driver.

●Depending on the position of the accel-

erator pedal, the system may not be

able to assist the driver to release the

accelerator pedal appropriately.

●If the vehicle ahead comes to a stand-

still, the vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still within the limitations of the system.

The system will release brake control

with a warning chime once it judges the

vehicle is at a standstill. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver must

depress the brake pedal. (The system

will resume control automatically once

the system reaches 3 MPH (5 km/h)).

Overriding the system:

The following driver’s operations override the

system operation.

●When the driver depresses the accelerator

pedal even further while the system is mov-

ing the accelerator pedal upward, the DCA

system control of the accelerator pedal is

canceled.

●When the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

pedal, the brake control by the system is not

operated.

●When the driver’s foot is on the brake pedal,

neither the brake control nor the alert by the

system operates.

●When the ICC system is set, the DCA sys-

tem will be cancelled.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead

due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if

another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the

driver with the chime and DCA system display.

Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to

maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

●The chime sounds.

●The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases

when there is a short distance between vehicles.

Some examples are:

●When the vehicles are traveling at the same

speed and the distance between vehicles is

not changing

●When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is in-

creasing

●When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when your

vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or

moving slowly.

Starting and driving 5-79

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when ICC

sensor detects vehicles in other lanes 䊊

Aor

objects on the side of the road 䊊

A. This may

cause the DCA system to operate inappro-

priately. The ICC sensor may detect these

objects when the vehicle is driven on wind-

ing roads, narrow roads, hilly roads or when

entering or exiting a curve. In these cases

you will have to manually control the

proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving

position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition

(for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some

damage).

Automatic cancellation

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the DCA system

is automatically canceled. The chime will sound

and the DCA cancellation message will display.

●When the VDC system is turned off

●When the VDC or ABS (including the TCS)

operates

●When the SNOW mode switch is turned

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer

present, turn the system off with the dynamic

driver assistance switch. Turn the DCA system

back on to use the system.

SSD0284A LSD2080

5-80 Starting and driving

Condition B:

When the sensor area of the front bumper is dirty,

making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the DCA system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the system warning light

(orange) will come on and the “Sensor Blocked”

indicator will appear.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the sensor

area of the bumper and then perform the settings

again.

Condition C:

When the DCA system is not operating properly,

the chime sounds and the system warning light

(“DCA” orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a

safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine,

and turn on the DCA system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the ve-

hicle is still driveable under normal condi-

tions, have the vehicle checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

Sensor maintenance

How to handle the sensor:

The sensor for the DCA system is common with

ICC and is located behind the front bumper.

For additional information, refer to “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range)”

in this section.

DCA warning light (orange)

LSD2081

Starting and driving 5-81

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system

will warn the driver by a warning light and chime

when your vehicle is getting close to the vehicle

ahead in the traveling lane.

The FCW system will function when your vehicle

is driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH

(15 km/h) and above.

The FCW system uses the distance sensor 䊊

located behind the front bumper to measure the

distance to the vehicle ahead. When the system

judges that your vehicle is getting close to the

vehicle ahead in the travel lane, the vehicle ahead

detection indicator light on the instrument panel

blinks and a warning chime sounds.

The FCW system can be turned on/off by push-

ing the warning systems switch. The warning

systems ON indicator light 䊊

1on the switch will

illuminate when the system is ON.

LSD2098

Vehicle ahead detection light

SSD0749

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING

(FCW) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-82 Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON FCW SYSTEM

WARNING

●The FCW system is intended to warn

you before a collision occurs; it cannot

prevent a collision. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

●As there is a performance limit, the sys-

tem may not provide a warning in cer-

tain conditions.

●The system will not detect the following

objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in

the roadway

– Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●The system will not detect another ve-

hicle under the following conditions:

– When the sensor area of the front

bumper gets dirty and it is impos-

sible to detect the distance from the

vehicle ahead.

– When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

●The system may not function properly

under the following conditions:

– A preceding vehicle is with a large

amount of ground clearance or pro-

truding freight (including a small ve-

hicle such as motorcycles).

– When the sensor area of the front

bumper gets dirty or it is impossible

to detect the distance from the ve-

hicle ahead.

– When visibility is low (such as rain,

fog, snow, etc.).

– When snow or road spray from trav-

eling vehicles is splashed.

– When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage

room of your vehicle.

– When abruptly accelerating or

decelerating.

– On a steep downhill slope or on

roads with sharp curves.

– When there is a highly reflective ob-

ject near the vehicle ahead (for ex-

ample, being very close to another

vehicle, signboard, etc.)

– When you are towing a trailer.

Warning systems switch

LSD2015

Starting and driving 5-83

●Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle

conditions (steering position or vehicle

position), or the preceding vehicle’s

conditions (position in lane, etc.), the

system may not function properly. The

system may detect highly reflective ob-

jects such as signs and other stationary

objects on the road or near the traveling

lane and provide unnecessary warning.

●The system may not function in offset

conditions.

●The system may not function when the

distance to the vehicle ahead is ex-

tremely close.

●The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. If the

sensor area of the front bumper is cov-

ered with ice, a transparent or translu-

cent bag, etc., the system may not de-

tect them. In these instances, the

system may not be able to warn the

driver properly. Be sure to check and

clean the sensor area of the front bum-

per regularly.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

●A sudden appearance of a vehicle in

front (for example, it abruptly cuts in)

may not be detected and the system

may not warn the driver soon enough.

●The system will be cancelled automati-

cally with a beep sound and a message

will pop up under the following

conditions:

– When the sensor area of the front

bumper is dirty

– When the system malfunctions

If the system cancels and a message appears

with a beep sound, pull off the road to a safe

location, stop the vehicle and turn the engine off.

Check to see if the sensor area of the front

bumper is blocked. If the sensor area of the front

bumper is blocked, remove the object blocking

and restart the engine.

If the sensor is malfunctioning, have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

FCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The FCW system is active at speeds of approxi-

mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above, when the

system turns on.

The warning systems switch is used to turn on

and off the FCW system when it is activated

using the settings menu on the information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to “How to

enable/disable the FCW system” using the set-

tings menu in this section.

Warning systems switch

LSD2015

5-84 Starting and driving

When the warning systems switch is turned off,

the indicator 䊊

1on the switch is off. The indicator

will also be off if the FCW, the Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) and the Blind Spot Warning

(BSW) systems are deactivated.

When the warning systems switch is pushed, the

LDW and BSW system will also turn on or off

simultaneously. For additional information, refer

to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” and “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI)/Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) sys-

tems” in this section.

For the sensor maintenance, refer to “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range)”

in this section.

How to enable/disable the FCW

system

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the FCW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use

the button to select “Driver Assis-

tance”. Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Driver Aids”, and press the ENTER

button.

3. To set the DCA system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the menu

and use the ENTER button to select or

change an item:

●Select “Forward” and press the ENTER

button.

– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER

button to check box for “Warning (FCW)”

– To turn on the system, use the ENTER

button to check box for “Assistance

(DCA)”

The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system warns

the driver by a warning light and chime when

there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead

in the traveling lane and the driver must take

avoidance action immediately. The system helps

reduce the rear-end collision speed by applying

the brakes when the system judges that the col-

lision cannot be prevented.

The IBA system will function when your vehicle is

driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH

(15 km/h) and above, and when your vehicle is

driven at speeds approximately 10 MPH

(15 km/h) faster than the vehicle ahead.

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-85

The IBA system uses a distance sensor 䊊

Alo-

cated behind the front bumper to measure the

distance to the vehicle ahead. When the system

judges that your vehicle is getting close to the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator light on the information

display blinks and a warning chime sounds.

The IBA system can be turned on/off by in the

settings of the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Driving aids” in

the “Instrument and controls” section of this

manual.

PRECAUTIONS ON IBA SYSTEM

WARNING

●The IBA system is not a collision avoid-

ance system. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

●As there is a performance limit, the sys-

tem may not provide a warning or brak-

ing in certain conditions.

●The system will not detect the following

objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in

the roadway

– Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●The sensor generally detects the sig-

nals returned from the vehicle ahead.

Therefore, the system may not function

properly under the following

conditions:

– When the sensor area of the front

bumper gets dirty and it is impos-

sible to detect the distance from the

vehicle ahead.

– When radar signal is temporarily

interrupted.

– When visibility is low (such as rain,

fog, snow, etc.).

– When snow or road spray from trav-

eling vehicles is splashed.

– When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage

room of your vehicle.

– When abruptly accelerating or

decelerating.

– On a steep downhill slope or on

roads with sharp curves.

LSD2098 SSD0749

5-86 Starting and driving

– When there is a highly reflective ob-

ject near the vehicle ahead (for ex-

ample, being very close to another

vehicle, signboard, etc.)

– When you are towing a trailer.

●Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle

conditions (steering position or vehicle

position), or the preceding vehicle’s

conditions (position in lane, etc.), the

system may not function properly. The

system may detect objects such as

signs and other stationary objects on

the road or near the traveling lane and

provide unnecessary warning.

●The system may not function in offset

conditions. WARNING

●In extreme conditions, detection of

these objects may cause the system to

function.

●The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. When

the sensor detects an obstruction of the

radar signals due to dirt, adhesive ma-

terial, or similar objects to the front

bumper, the system will automatically

cancel. However, sensor may not detect

all obstructive material. In these in-

stances the system may not be able to

warn the driver properly. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor area of the

front bumper regularly.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

●A sudden appearance of a vehicle in

front (for example, it abruptly cuts in)

may not be detected and the system

may not warn the driver soon enough.

●The system will be cancelled automati-

cally with a beep sound and the IBA

warning light will illuminate under the

following conditions:

– When the sensor area of the front

bumper is dirty

– When the system malfunctions

Reflectors on the road

LSD2021

Starting and driving 5-87

If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates with a

beep sound, pull off the road to a safe location,

stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. Check to

see if the sensor area of the front bumper is dirty.

If the sensor area of the front bumper is dirty,

clean it with a soft cloth and restart the engine. If

the sensor area of the front bumper is not dirty,

restart the engine. If the IBA OFF indicator light

continues to illuminate even if the IBA system is

turned on, have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

IBA SYSTEM OPERATION

The IBA system will function when your vehicle is

driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH

(15 km/h) or above, and when the vehicle’s

speed is approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster

than that of the vehicle ahead.

To turn the system on/off:

1. Push the button to enter the “Set-

tings” menu in the vehicle information dis-

play, then select using the ENTER button.

2. Use the buttons to select “Driver As-

sistance”, then press the ENTER button.

3. Use the buttons to select “Intelligent

Brake Assist”, using the ENTER button the

system can be turned on or off.

The IBA system will remain in the last ON or OFF

state it was left in until it is changed in the vehicle

information display. For additional information,

refer to “Driver Assistance”in the “Instrument and

controls” section of this manual.

Illumination of the IBA OFF indicator light without

the warning chime sound is an indication that the

IBA system is temporarily unavailable. It will occur

under the following conditions:

When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

The IBA OFF indicator light will turn off when the

system returns to its normal operating conditions.

For the sensor maintenance, refer to “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range)”

in this section.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-

ommendations may result in shortened

engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 RPM.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi

(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-88 Starting and driving

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

●Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

●When entering a hot vehicle, opening the

windows will help to reduce the inside

temperature faster, resulting in reduced

demand on your A/C system.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended scheduled main-

tenance.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep all the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent AWD

system while the engine is running, messages are

displayed in the meter.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT AWD (if so equipped)

5-90 Starting and driving

If the AWD error warning message is displayed,

there may be a malfunction in the Intelligent AWD

system. Reduce vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible.

The AWD high temperature message may be

displayed while trying to free a stuck vehicle due

to increased oil temperature. The driving mode

may change to 2-wheel drive. If this message is

displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling,

as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the message

turns off, you can continue driving.

The tire size message may be displayed if there is

a large difference between the diameters of front

and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area,

with the engine idling. Check that all tire sizes are

the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that

the tires are not excessively worn.

If any warning messages continue to be dis-

played, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI

retailer as soon as possible.

LSD2082 LSD2083 LSD2084

Starting and driving 5-91

WARNING

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires. Accelerating

quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or

sudden braking may cause loss of con-

trol, even with Intelligent AWD

engaged.

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise 2 wheels off the ground

and shift the transmission to any drive

or reverse position with the engine run-

ning. Doing so may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious per-

sonal injury or vehicle damage.

●

Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such

as the dynamometers used by some

states for emissions testing) or similar

equipment even if the other 2 wheels are

raised off the ground. Make sure that you

inform the test facility personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with AWD be-

fore it is placed on a dynamometer. Using

the wrong test equipment may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

personal injury or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the engine on a free

roller when any of the wheels are

raised.

●If you use the free roller, rotate 4 wheels

with the same speed without raising

any wheels.

●If an AWD warning message is dis-

played while driving there may be a

malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce

the vehicle speed immediately and have

your vehicle checked by an INFINITI re-

tailer as soon as possible.

●The powertrain may be damaged if you

continue driving when the AWD tem-

perature or tire size incorrect messages

are displayed

●If the AWD high temperature message

is displayed while you are driving, pull

off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. The driving mode will change to

2WD to prevent the AWD system from

malfunctioning. If the warning message

turns off, you can drive again.

●If the tire size incorrect message is dis-

played while you are driving, pull off the

road in a safe area with the engine

idling. Check that all tire sizes are the

same, that the tire pressure is correct

and that the tires are not excessively

worn.

●If a warning message continues to be

displayed after the above operations,

have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

5-92 Starting and driving

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

The power steering system is designed to pro-

vide power assist while driving to operate the

steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-

heating of the power steering system and protect

it from getting damaged. While the power assist

is reduced, steering wheel operation will become

heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still per-

formed, the power steering may stop and the

power steering warning light will illuminate. In a

safe location, stop the engine and push the igni-

tion switch to the OFF position. The temperature

of the power steering system will go down after a

period of time and the power assist level will

return to normal after starting the engine. The

power steering warning light will go off. Avoid

repeating such steering wheel operations that

could cause the power steering system to over-

heat.

You may hear a sound from the front of the vehicle

when the steering wheel is operated quickly. This

is a normal operational noise and is not a mal-

function.

If the electric power steering warning light PS

illuminates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not func-

tioning properly and may need servicing. Have

the power steering system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, there will be

no power assist for the steering but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-94 Starting and driving

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the

effect of the parking brake is weakened or when-

ever the parking brake shoes and/or rotors are

replaced, in order to assure the best brake per-

formance.

This procedure is described in the INFINITI Ser-

vice Manual and can be performed by an INFINITI

retailer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from careless

or dangerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control during

braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-

ber that stopping distances on slippery

surfaces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front of

you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-

sible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire and loading

information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section

of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the

brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-

pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Starting and driving 5-95

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-

plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action

is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-

ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated

generating greater braking force than a conven-

tional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. it is the driv-

ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent

Cruise Control system equipped

models)

When the Preview Function identifies the need to

apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle

ahead in the same lane and the distance and

relative speed from it, it applies the brake pre-

pressure before the driver depresses the brake

pedal and helps improve brake response by re-

ducing pedal free play.

●This system will not operate when the ve-

hicle is moving at approximately 32 km/h

(20 MPH) or less.

●The pre-pressure function ceases when the

following conditions are met:

1. When the driver depresses the accelerator

pedal or the brake pedal.

2. If the driver does not operate the accelerator

or brake pedal within approximately 1 sec-

ond.

5-96 Starting and driving

●The sensor will not detect:

1. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

2. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

3. Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

as illustrated

WARNING

●This system is only an aid to assist brak-

ing operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

●As there is a performance limit to the

Preview Function, never rely solely on

this system. This system does not cor-

rect careless inattentive or absent-

minded driving, or overcome poor vis-

ibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather.

Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe

distance between vehicles.

●The system may not detect the vehicle

in front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. The Preview Function may

not operate properly under the follow-

ing conditions. The vehicle is still drive-

able under normal conditions and the

Brake Assist will operate.

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

system sensor

– When strong light (for example, at

sunrise or sunset) is directly shining

on the front of the vehicle

– Winding or hilly roads may cause the

sensor to temporarily not detect a

vehicle in the same lane or may de-

tect objects or vehicles in other

lanes.

– Vehicle position in the lane may

cause the sensor to temporarily not

detect a vehicle in the same lane or

may detect objects or vehicles in

other lanes.

SSD0338

Starting and driving 5-97

Warning light and display

When the Preview Function is not operating

properly, the chime sounds and the system warn-

ing light (orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a

safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine

and resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicate that

the Preview Function is malfunctioning

(the brake is operative). Although the ve-

hicle is still driveable under normal condi-

tions, have the vehicle checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

How to handle the sensor

The sensor for the Preview Function is common

with the ICC and is located below the front

bumper.

To keep the Preview Function operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the area around the sensor

clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

●Do not touch or remove the screw located

on the sensor. Doing so could cause failure

or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due

to an accident, contact an INFINITI retailer.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

sensor. This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses

various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-

hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,

the VDC System helps to perform the following

functions:

●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

●Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following condi-

tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased steer-

ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of

vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-

cator in the instrument panel flashes to note the

following:

LSD2067

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-98 Starting and driving

●The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

●Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator

light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

and indicator lights come on in the instru-

ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns

off when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The indicator illuminates to indi-

cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to prevent

one drive wheel from slipping by transferring

power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off and the indicator will not

flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on

when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain controllability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or by

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. Reduce vehicle speed and be

especially careful when driving and cor-

nering on slippery surfaces and always

drive carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not INFINITI

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and both the

and the indicator lights may

illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the and

indicator lights may illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-99

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after driv-

ing onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights may

illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (if so

equipped)

This system senses driving based on the driver’s

steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and

controls brake pressure at individual wheels to

help smooth vehicle response.

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system, the active trace control system is

also turned off.

If the active trace control is not functioning prop-

erly, the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates in the

instrument panel.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the

system optimizes the distribution of force to each

of the four wheels depending on the radius of the

turn.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain controllability but can-

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or by

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. Reduce vehicle speed and be

especially careful when driving and cor-

nering on slippery surfaces and always

drive carefully.

●The active trace control and brake force

distribution systems may not be effec-

tive depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not INFINITI

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

5-100 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Always turn and look back before back-

ing up. The rear sonar system is not a

substitute for proper backing

procedures.

●Always look around before proceeding.

The front sonar system is not a substi-

tute for proper driving procedures.

●Read and understand the limitations of

the front and rear sonar system as con-

tained in this section. Inclement

weather may affect the function of the

sonar system, this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

●This system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary ob-

jects to help avoid damaging the ve-

hicle. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or

on the ground.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

front bumper fascia or the rear bumper

fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the

sensing zone may be altered causing

inaccurate measurement of obstacles

or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System sounds a tone to warn

the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper. The

Rear Sonar System automatically turns on when

the shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the

ignition is ON. The system may not detect objects

at speeds above 3 MPH (5 km/h) and may not

detect certain angular or moving objects.

The Rear Sonar System detects obstacles up to

5.9 feet (1.8 meters) from the rear bumper with a

decreased coverage area at the outer corners of

the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approxi-

mate zone coverage areas). As you move closer

to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases.

When the obstacle is less than 10 inches

(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously.

If it detects a stationary or receding object further

Rear Sensor

LSD0095

Front Sensor

LSD0202

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

5-102 Starting and driving

than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of the

vehicle, the tone will sound for only 3 seconds.

Once the system detects an object approaching,

the tone will sound again.

The Front Sonar System sounds a tone to warn

the driver of obstacles near the front bumper. The

front sonar system automatically turns on when

the shift lever is placed in a forward gear and the

ignition switch is in the ON position. The system

may not detect objects at speeds above 3 MPH

(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or

moving objects.

The Front Sonar System detects obstacles up to

3 feet (1.0 m) from the front bumper with a

decreased coverage area at the outer corners of

the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approxi-

mate zone coverage areas). As you move closer

to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases.

When the obstacle is less than 10 inches

(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously.

If it detects a stationary or receding object further

than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of the

vehicle, the tone will sound for only 3 seconds.

Once the system detects an object approaching,

the tone will sound again.

The front and rear sonar system OFF switch on

the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the

sonar system on and off. To turn the system off,

the ignition must be ON, and the shift lever in R

(Reverse) or D (Drive). An indicator light on the

switch will illuminate when the system is turned

off. If the indicator light illuminates when the

system is not turned off, it may indicate a failure in

the sonar system.

Keep the front and rear sonar sensors (located on

the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large

accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors

with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it

will affect the accuracy of the sonar system.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The system informs with a visual and audible

signal of front obstacles when the shift lever is in

the D (Drive) position and both front and rear

obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Re-

verse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

Px†x†

Rooo o

Nx†x†

Doox †

o – Display/Beep when detect

† – Display on camera view

x – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds

when an obstacle is detected by only the corner

sensor and the distance does not change. The

tone will stop when the obstacle get away from

the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds

intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to

the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow

and the rate of the blinking increase. When the

vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator

stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds

continuously.

Starting and driving 5-103

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold

temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or

a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-

ously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

5-106 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2

Roadside assistance program.......................6-2

Emergency engine shut off .........................6-3

Flat tire ...........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-3

Changing a flat tire .............................6-4

Jump starting ....................................6-10

Push starting.....................................6-12

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-12

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-13

Towing recommended by INFINITI ...............6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).........6-15

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency, roadside

assistance service is available to you. Please

refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.)

or the Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa-

tion Booklet (Canada) for details.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

6-2 In case of emergency

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in

the vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pressure of

all tires (except the spare tire) on the display

screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being

driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure

warning light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to

“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”

in the “Instruments and controls” section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the CVT is shifted into P

(Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back

of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to

prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked

up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2142

6-4 In case of emergency

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage board

in the cargo area using the handle 䊊

2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by lifting

up using the handles.

3. Remove the tool kit 䊊

●To release the tool kit, release the hook

and eye straps 䊊

LCE2035 LCE2036 LCE2037

In case of emergency 6-5

4. Remove the jack.

●The jack is secured by a fastener 䊊

D.To

release the fastener, assemble the exten-

sion 䊊

Einto the wheel nut wrench 䊊

Fas

illustrated and rotate counterclockwise to

release.

●Insert the flat end of the wheel nut wrench

䊊

Finto the slot of the fastener 䊊

D, and

rotate counterclockwise to release the

jack.

5. The lowering mechanism for the spare tire is

located on the passenger side of the cargo

area. Remove the cover 䊊

Gto access the

spare tire winch.

6. Insert the spare tire winch socket 䊊

Hto the

lowering mechanism nut.

7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel nut

wrench 䊊

Fto the extension 䊊

Eand insert

the T-shaped end to the winch socket 䊊

and rotate counterclockwise.

8. After removing the spare tire from under the

vehicle, be sure to crank the cable up to

stow it.

NOTE:

Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle

before attempting to remove the winch

from the spare tire.

9. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

CAUTION

●Make sure safety cable is coiled above

spare tire when reinstalling spare

tire/wheel.

●When re-installing the spare tire under

the vehicle after use, be sure to secure it

with the tire stem facing down toward

the ground. If the spare tire is improp-

erly secured with the tire stem facing up

towards the bottom of the vehicle, there

is an increased risk of separating from

the vehicle in the event of a crash which

may pose a hazard in traffic or risk of

injury to others.

LCE2038 LCE2169

6-6 In case of emergency

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

Always refer to the illustration for the correct

placement and jack-up points for your specific

vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

In case of emergency 6-7

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The

jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-

rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack

as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the

tire clears the ground.

LCE2040 LCE0087

6-8 In case of emergency

NOTE:

If the lug nut wrench/jack handle contacts

the ground while raising the vehicle, disas-

semble the lug nut wrench from the jack

extension rod, rotate it 90 degrees and re-

assemble.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until

they are tight (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D,䊊

E).

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

䊊

E). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

LCE2043 WCE0056

In case of emergency 6-9

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire

and loading information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

6. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all

sparks and flames away from the

battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-

ure to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary elec-

trical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,

etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence

illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to

4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-11

CAUTION

●CVT models cannot be push-started or

tow-started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

●Do not push start this vehicle. The 3-way

catalyst may be damaged.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-

voir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading and

the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine

coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you

feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-

ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not

open the hood further until no steam or

coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings ..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-4

Power moonroof................................7-4

Floor mats . . ...................................7-5

Seat belts .....................................7-6

Cleaning the seat tracks.........................7-6

Corrosion protection ...............................7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-6

Protect your vehicle from corrosion...............7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

●after driving on coastal roads

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at an INFINITI retailer or any automotive acces-

sory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification

sensor. This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof is made from a suede material.

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the moonroof

while cleaning:

●Do not rub the material with a cloth.

Doing so can damage the surface of the

material or cause a stain to spread.

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar chemical to clean the suede. This

may discolor the moonroof and damage

the surface.

●Clean water based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth damp-

ened in warm water. Press a clean dry

cloth onto the surface to remove as

much dampness as possible and then

let air dry.

●Clean oil based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth damp-

ened in warm water. Press a clean dry

cloth onto the surface to remove as

much dampness as possible and then

let air dry.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision or injury:

●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front

position.

●Use only genuine INFINITI floor mats

specifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model. For additional information,

refer to your INFINITI retailer.

●Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning aid.

Refer to ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖin

this section.

The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can ex-

tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-

tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they

become excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes the following floor mat po-

sitioning aids to help keep your floor mats in

place:

●two driver’s side front floor mat brackets

●two passenger’s side front floor mat brack-

ets

●one driver’s side 2nd row floor mat bracket

●one passenger’s side 2nd row floor mat

bracket

Genuine INFINITI floor mats have been specially

designed for your vehicle model. The floor mats

have grommet holes incorporated in them. Posi-

tion each mat by placing the floor mat bracket

hook through the floor mat grommet holes while

centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are

properly positioned.

Bracket

LAI2002

Bracket positions

LAI2003

Appearance and care 7-5

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety –

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-

vent reduction of ability to move the seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum

cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to

adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be

used if necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

●the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas

●damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic collisions

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-6 Appearance and care

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, con-

sult an INFINITI retailer.

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements..........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2

Maintenance precautions ...........................8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................8-6

Engine cooling system .............................8-7

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8

Changing engine coolant ........................8-8

Engine oil.........................................8-9

Checking engine oil level ........................8-9

Changing engine oil ...........................8-10

Changing engine oil filter .......................8-11

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ......8-12

Power steering fluid...............................8-12

Brake fluid .......................................8-13

Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-14

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-14

Battery ..........................................8-14

Jump starting .................................8-16

Variable voltage control system.....................8-16

Drive belt ........................................8-17

Spark plugs......................................8-18

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-18

Air cleaner .......................................8-18

In-cabin microfilter.............................8-19

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-19

Cleaning .....................................8-19

Replacing ....................................8-20

Brakes ..........................................8-21

Fuses ...........................................8-22

Engine compartment...........................8-22

Passenger compartment .......................8-23

Battery replacement ..............................8-24

INFINITI Intelligent Key .........................8-25

Lights ...........................................8-26

Headlights....................................8-26

Fog lights.....................................8-26

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-27

Wheels and tires .................................8-31

Tire pressure..................................8-31

Tire labeling...................................8-34

Types of tires..................................8-37

Tire chains....................................8-38

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38

Your INFINITI has been designed to have mini-

mum maintenance requirements with long ser-

vice intervals to save you both time and money.

However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your INFINITI’s

good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-

sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

INFINITI at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, an INFINITI

retailer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected by an INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-retailer training programs. They are

completely qualified to work on INFINITI vehicles

before they work on your vehicle, rather than

after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that an INFINITI retailer’s

service department performs the best job to meet

the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —

in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have an

INFINITI retailer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify an INFINITI retailer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-

ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid

level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the

reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by an INFINITI retailer. See the

carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

additional information, refer to “Appearance and

care” section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even if

the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion and the engine is not running. To

avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before working

near the fan.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●The fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by an INFINITI retailer because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or continuously

variable transmission related compo-

nent harnesses disconnected while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine INFINITI service manual is also avail-

able. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s

Manual/Service Manual order information” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by an INFINITI retailer.

LDI2498

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Drive belt location

4. Fuse box

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse box

9. Fuse box/fusible links

10 Fuse box

11. Battery

12. Engine oil dipstick

13. Radiator cap

14. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and

coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-

gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional information,

refer to precautions in “If your vehicle

overheats” found in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

●Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause dam-

age to the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

●When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection

is needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solutions

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

may damage the engine cooling

system.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

●The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or

7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-

ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer to

the INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level 䊊

1, add coolant to the MAX level

䊊

2. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of

the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re-

duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.

For additional information, refer to the “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-

ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten

it until a clicking sound is heard.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

For additional information on the location of the

engine coolant reservoir, refer to ⬙Engine com-

partment check locations⬙in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

An INFINITI retailer can change the engine cool-

ant. The service procedure can be found in the

INFINITI Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

LDI2519

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the engine

is hot. Serious burns could be caused by

high pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark 䊊

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not fill oil level above H

(High) mark 䊊

6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

LDI2087 WDI0214

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in

this section.

LDI2622

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in

the “Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual for drain and refill

capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

4. Remove pins 䊊

Cfrom the right engine pro-

tector located inside the right wheel well,

then remove protector. Remove oil filter 䊊

with an oil filter wrench by turning it counter-

clockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turn-

ing it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

●Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the sealing

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to an oil leak and en-

gine damage.

●The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from the

dipstick hole when filling the engine

with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

LDI2342

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine

oil if necessary.

CAUTION

●INFINITI recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 ONLY in

INFINITI CVTs. Do not mix with other

fluids.

●Do not use Automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission fluid

in an INFINITI CVT, as it may damage

the CVT. Damage caused by the use of

fluids other than recommended is not

covered under INFINITI’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

●Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under INFINITI’s

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is

required, we recommend your INFINITI retailer for

servicing.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked when the fluid

is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86ºF (0 to

30ºC). The fluid level can be checked with the

level gauge which is attached to the cap. To

check the fluid level, remove the cap. The fluid

level should be between the MAX 䊊

1and MIN 䊊

lines.

If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊

2line, add Genuine

NISSAN E-PSF. Remove the cap and fill through

the opening.

LDI2146

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CAUTION

●DO NOT OVERFILL.

●Use of a power steering fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the

power steering system from operating

properly.

●Power steering fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked

containers out of the reach of children.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage

the brake system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface with

water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake

fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the brake warning

light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX

line 䊊

A. For additional information, refer to “Rec-

ommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual for the recommended type of

brake fluid.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the

brake system should be thoroughly checked by

an INFINITI retailer.

For additional information on the location of the

brake fluid reservoir, refer to “Engine compart-

ment check locations” in this section.

LDI2463

BRAKE FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low

windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-

washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze

or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the windshield-washer fluid reser-

voir. Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid

concentrate and water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

LDI2089

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID BATTERY

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen

gas generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-

ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or injury. After touch-

ing a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce battery

life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

WDI0224

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall

the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-

ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage

control system. This system measures the

amount of electrical discharge from the battery

and controls voltage generated by the generator.

LDI0302

LDI2132

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-

ping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required see your INFINITI re-

tailer for assistance.

Clean and replace the air cleaner filter according

to the maintenance log shown in the “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide.” When replac-

ing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter

housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

䊊

1Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner

cover upward.

Remove the air cleaner filter and wipe the inside

of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with

a damp cloth.

SDI1895 LDI2090

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the

housing and latch the clips.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. Refer to the

“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” for

change intervals.

If replacement is required, see your INFINITI re-

tailer. CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release tab 䊊

Bthen move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm 䊊

Cto remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the

groove.

6. Return the wiper to its original position and

release it until it has made contact with the

windshield.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the windshield-washer nozzle

䊊

A. This may cause clogging or improper

windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the

nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 䊊

LDI2486

WDI0570

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Rear window wiper blade

Contact an INFINITI retailer if checking or re-

placement is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI retailer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information regard-

ing brake inspections, refer to the appropriate

maintenance schedule information in the

“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.

BRAKES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the fuse block in the

passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a new

fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by an INFINITI

retailer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2267 LDI0456

FUSES

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by an INFINITI

retailer.

Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

remove the extended storage switch and check

for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used for

long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-

tended storage switch is broken it is not

necessary to replace it. Replace only the

open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

LDI2092 LDI0456 LDI2035

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

How to remove the extended storage

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, be

sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF

position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊

1found on each

side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the

fuse box 䊊

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

SDI1867

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊

Ainto the slit 䊊

of the corner and twist it to separate the

upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to

protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊

and 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See an INFINITI retailer if you need assistance for

replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s au-

thority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

WDI0535

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlight bulb

If replacement is required, see your INFINITI re-

tailer.

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-

duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric

shock, never attempt to modify or disas-

semble. Always have your xenon head-

lights replaced at an INFINITI retailer. For

additional information, refer to “Headlight

and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

FOG LIGHTS

Replacing the fog light bulb

If replacement is required, see your INFINITI re-

tailer.

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

●Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light

for a long period of time as dust, mois-

ture and smoke may enter the fog light

body and affect the performance of the

fog light.

LIGHTS

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly*

High/ Low 35 D2S

Park 5 W5W

Turn 21 PY21W

Sidemarker (if so equipped) 5 W5W

Front fog lights 55 H11

Daytime running lights (Canada only) 19 PS19W

Room/map lights 8 –

Footwell light 3.4 158

Personal lights 8 P27

Glove box light* 8 258

Step light 3.4 194

Courtesy light* — —

Puddle lights* — —

Vanity mirror light 2 —

Cargo light 8 AL26

High-mounted stop light* — —

Rear combination light

Tail/Stop* — —

Turn 21 WY21W

Rear sidemarker — —

Backup (reversing)* 18 921

License plate light* 5 W5W

* See an INFINITI retailer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI retailer for the latest parts information.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

1. Headlight assembly

2 Map light

3 Personal light

4. Cargo light

5. License plate light

6. Rear combination light

7. Courtesy light

8. Fog light/ Daytime running light

(Canada only)

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light

and/or cover using a cloth and suitable tool.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

LDI2496

WDI0263

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Use a cloth 䊊

1to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊

1to protect the housing.

Map lights

LDI2094

Personal lights

LDI2640

Vanity mirror

LDI2096

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Use a cloth 䊊

1to protect the housing.

1. Remove the trim surrounding 䊊

1the hous-

ing.

2. Remove the two screws holding the assem-

bly 䊊

2to the vehicle.

3. Remove the assembly 䊊

4. Replace the necessary bulbs 䊊

Cargo light

WDI0206

Rear combination light

LDI2085

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual for additional information.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit and the “Tire Pressure

Low – Add Air” warning appears in the

vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pres-

sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

the display screen by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Low

tire pressure warning light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section and “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator pro-

vides visual and audible signals outside

the vehicle for inflating the tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. For

additional information, refer to “TPMS

with Tire Inflation Indicator” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do

not load your vehicle beyond this

capacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced tire

life, unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may also

result in failure of other vehicle

components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/65R18

33 PSI, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/55R20

33 PSI, 230 kPa

Spare Tire:

T165/90D18 60 PSI, 420 kPa

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-

ture.

6. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester

and others.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

Example

WDI0396

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. An INFINITI retailer may

be able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the low tire pres-

sure warning system.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all 4

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installed

on 235/55R20 size tires. Installation of the

tire chains/cables on 235/55R20 size tires

will cause damage to the vehicle. If you

plan to use tire chains/cables, you should

install 235/65R18 size tires on your

vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners

when recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the

tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

INFINITI recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information, refer to “Flat

tire” in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual for tire replacing proce-

dures.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, contact an INFINITI

retailer.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0259

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, VDC system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration,

headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to acci-

dents and could result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and

you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an acci-

dent and personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect the

VDC system and/or interference with

the brake discs/drums. Such interfer-

ence can lead to decreased braking ef-

ficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe

wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual for wheel off-set

dimensions.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MEMO

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities .......9-2

Fuel recommendation ...........................9-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ..............................9-7

Specifications.....................................9-8

Engine ........................................9-8

Wheels and tires ...............................9-9

Dimensions and weights ........................9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ..................................9-10

Vehicle identification ..............................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .........9-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ..............................9-10

Engine serial number...........................9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-11

Emission control information label ...............9-11

Tire and loading information label................9-12

Air conditioner specification label................9-12

Installing front license plate ........................9-13

Vehicle loading information ........................9-14

Terms ........................................9-14

Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-15

Securing the load..............................9-17

Loading tips ..................................9-17

Measurement of weights .......................9-18

Towing a trailer ...................................9-18

Maximum load limits ...........................9-19

Towing load/specification.......................9-22

Towing safety .................................9-22

Flat towing....................................9-29

Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-29

Emission control system warranty ..................9-30

Reporting safety defects ..........................9-31

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-32

Event Data Recorders (EDR) (if so equipped)........9-32

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-33

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 19-1/2 gal 16-1/4 gal 74 L • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recom-

mendation” in this section.

Engine oil Drain and refill

• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil”

in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

VQ35DE

With oil filter

change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8 L

• Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent

• Viscosity SAE 0W-20

• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE

5W-30 conventions petroleum oils may be used

and meet all specifications and requirements

necessary to maintain the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil

and oil filter recommendations” in this section.

Without oil filter

change 4-3/4 qt 4 qt 4.5 L

Cooling system With reservoir 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal 9.6 L • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) water or equivalent

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• INFINITI recommends using Genuine NISSAN

CVT Fluid NS-3 ONLY in INFINITI CVTs. Do not

mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not

equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recommended is not

covered under INFINITI’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded pre-

mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research

octane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-

line is not available, you may use unleaded regular

gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91), but you

may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the INFINITI new vehicle limited

warranty.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. INFINITI

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol

with or without advertising their presence.

INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your INFINITI cannot be readily de-

termined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

●E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle

limited warranty.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in INFINITI ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel

ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can

only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15

fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-

ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-

ing pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have an INFINITI retailer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. For additional infor-

mation, refer to ⬙Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities⬙in this section. INFINITI recom-

mends the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil ad-

ditives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary

when the proper oil type is used and maintenance

intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new INFINITI vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

LTI2051

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your INFINITI

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN

A/C system oil DH-PS or the exact equiva-

lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

INFINITI vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. An INFINITI retailer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact an INFINITI retailer when servicing your

air conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Offset in (mm) Size

Aluminum 1.97 (50) 18 x 7.5J

1.97 (50) 20 x 7.5J

Spare Wheel - Steel 18 x4T

Tire size 235/65R18

235/55R20

Spare tire T165/90D18

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 196.5 (4,990)

Overall width in (mm) 77.2 (1,960)

Overall height

without roof rack in (mm) 68.6 (1,742)

with roof rack in (mm) 71.4 (1,813)

Front and rear track in (mm) 65.7 (1,670)

Wheelbase in (mm) 114.2 (2,900)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the

driver’s side front and rear

doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 9-9

When planning to drive your INFINITI ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district and

registered, its modifications, transporta-

tion, and registration are the responsibility

of the user. INFINITI is not responsible for

any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The VIN plate is located as shown. This number is

the identification for your vehicle and is used in

the vehicle registration.

The VIN number is also available through the

center display screen. For additional information,

refer to your “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

TI1050M LTI2028

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),

etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI2034 WTI0172 WTI0167

Technical and consumer information 9-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0058 WTI0173

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag:

Only use the recommended mounting position,

otherwise the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if

so equipped) sensor obstruction may result.

●License plate bracket

●License plate bracket (J-nut) screws x 2

●License plate screws x 2

●Screw grommets x 2

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Locate the center position 䊊

Aas illustrated.

Line up the license plate bracket under the

top of the front bumper 䊊

Bwith the tabs 䊊

Hold the license plate bracket in place.

3. Mark the center of the hole 䊊

Dwith a felt-tip

pen.

4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in

(10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be

sure that the drill only goes through the

bumper fascia.)

5. Insert the grommets into the holes in the

bumper fascia.

LTI2035

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 9-13

6. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into

the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of

the grommet 90° 䊊

Mark the center of the hole 䊊

Fon both sides with

a felt-tip pen. Remove the bracket from the bum-

per, and then open 0.79 in (20 mm) diameter

holes on the bumper using the marks 䊊

Fas a

center.

7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

8. Install the license plate bracket with screws.

9. Install the license plate with bolts that are no

longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

LTI2033

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-14 Technical and consumer information

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX

kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX lbs

or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI0152

9-16 Technical and consumer information

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the GVWR or the

GAWR for your vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Measurement of

weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the “Tire and Loading Information label” in

the Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks located in the cargo

area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than

6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single metal floor hook

when securing cargo.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

Cargo area luggage hooks

LIC2208

Technical and consumer information 9-17

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can

break, tire damage could occur,

or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.InfinitiUSA.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

TOWING A TRAILER

9-18 Technical and consumer information

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the following Towing

Load/Specification Chart found in this section.

The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its

cargo weight.

●When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified

in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

than these or using improper towing equipment

could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle over-

heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

INFINITI warranties.

LTI2030

Technical and consumer information 9-19

To determine the available towing capacity, use

the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙chart found in

this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).

●Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification⬙chart -

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).

●Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-

ing Load/Specification⬙chart - 9,100 lb.

(4,128 kg).

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg) GVWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lb. (409 kg) Available for tongue

weight

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg) GCWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for

towing

900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10% tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the

trailer tongue load specification recommended

by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-

tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification shown in

the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match

the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

U.S. and Canada

Maximum Towing Capacity*1 5,000 lb.

(2,268 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load 500 lb.

(227 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 10,000 lb.

(4,536 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve

the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi-

cle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional

trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This

hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball

that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

INFINITI ball mounts and hitch balls are available

from your INFINITI retailer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional

trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of

your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your

vehicle and trailer. A genuine INFINITI trailer hitch

is available from your INFINITI retailer. Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle

to help avoid personal injury or property damage

due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road

surfaces or passing trucks.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the

hitch components. Doing so can cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and

the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should

be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is

one that is designed to carry the whole amount of

tongue weight and gross weight directly on the

ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or

“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball

mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue

weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-

hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue weight

transferred through the frame and pushing down

on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow

vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is

recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a

maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).

Check with the trailer and towing equipment

manufacturers to determine if they recommend

the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-

fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If

you are considering use of a weight-

distributing hitch system with a surge

brake-equipped trailer, check with the

surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer

to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-

turer for installing and using the weight-

distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed,

allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes

so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of

the vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

2. Locate the jumper harness connector under

the lower portion of the instrument panel.

The connector is taped to the wiring harness

䊊

1as indicated.

●The connector is marked with a white tag

with “elec brake conn”.

Wire color designation for electric trailer brake

controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTE

RED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch

to trailer brake controller.

BLACK Brake controller ground

(-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.

RED/BLUE Not used

RED Fused trailer brake con-

troller battery feed (B+).

3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper

harness to the connector.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake

controller according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

Connector Location

LTI2045

Connector

LTI2046

9-26 Technical and consumer information

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●Determine the overall height of the vehicle

and trailer so the required clearance is

known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-

tently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

Technical and consumer information 9-27

●While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-

crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-

tain adequate control, reduce your speed

and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or

repeated use of the brakes when descend-

ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness

and could cause overheating. Shifting to a

lower gear instead provides “engine brak-

ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-

quently.

●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a

high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this owner’s manual.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “INFINITI Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or

applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described in this section.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Downshift the transmission to a lower gear

for engine braking when driving down steep

or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle

without applying the brakes.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●INFINITI recommends that the cruise control

not be used while towing a trailer.

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after

50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

9-28 Technical and consumer information

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer to

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-

ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-

sion parts due to lack of transmission

lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by INFINITI”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously

variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle

dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s

drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-

turer’s recommendations when using their prod-

uct.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-29

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the following emis-

sion warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your INFINITI. If you did

not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is

lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

●INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet which comes with your INFINITI. If

you did not receive a Warranty Information Book-

let, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by

writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

9-30 Technical and consumer information

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-662-6200.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform Transport Canada in addition

to notifying INFINITI.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that INFINITI con-

duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-

port Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your re-

tailer, or INFINITI.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division

toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may

also report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify INFINITI of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 9-31

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) should never be tested using a two

wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-

mometers used by some states for emis-

sions testing), or similar equipment. Make

sure you inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may re-

sult in transmission damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could re-

sult in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink

after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”. Contact an INFINITI retailer to set the

“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for

testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The main

purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain colli-

sion or near collision-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,

data that will assist in understanding how a vehi-

cle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics and

safety systems for a short period of time, typically

30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which collisions and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial collision situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and collision location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR data

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) (if

so equipped)

9-32 Technical and consumer information

with the type of personally identifying data rou-

tinely acquired during a collision investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and INFINITI retailer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

Genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for this model

year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

INFINITI Service Manual is the best source of

service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory-

trained technicians working at INFINITI retailer-

ships. Genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

INFINITI Service Manuals, contact:

www.infiniti-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine INFINITI Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model

year and prior, please contact your nearest

INFINITI retailer. For the phone number and loca-

tion of an INFINITI retailer in your area call the

INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-4792

and a bilingual INFINITI representative will assist

you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-33

MEMO

9-34 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

2nd row bench seat adjustment ......1-5,1-7

Aiming control, headlights ...........2-34

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system).....................1-48

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact

air bag system) ...............1-55

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-12

Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-66, 2-12

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner service ...........4-53

Air conditioner specification label .....9-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .............9-7

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ...............4-45

Heater and air conditioner controls ....4-46

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-53

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .........2-25

Anchor point locations .............1-31

Antenna .....................4-97

Anti-lock brake warning light ..........2-9

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-95

Armrests .....................1-8

Around View™ Monitor .............4-27

Audible reminders ...............2-15

Audio system ..................4-53

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54

Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91

Compact disc (CD) player .........4-73

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player

Operation ..................4-76

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player .................4-68

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53

iPod® Player .............4-85,4-87

iPod® player operation .......4-85,4-87

Radio ....................4-53

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-95

USB interface ............4-80,4-81

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port..................4-80,4-81

Autolight switch.................2-33

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner .........3-34

Automatic power window switch .....2-55

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-32

Automatic door locks ..............3-6

Automatic drive positioner ...........3-34

Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)

system ......................5-44

Backup Collision Warning (BCW) system . .5-44

Battery .................5-104, 8-14

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

Battery replacement

INFINITI Intelligent Key ...........8-25

Before starting the engine ...........5-16

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-17

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) system .....5-32

Block heater

Engine ...................5-106

Bluetooth® audio................4-91

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system.................4-109, 4-123

Boosterseats..................1-45

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-95

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-27

Brake system ................5-94

Brakewarninglight..............2-9

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-15, 8-21

Parking brake operation ..........5-21

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-21

Brake fluid ....................8-13

Brakes ......................

-21

Brake system ..................5-94

Break-inschedule ...............5-88

Brightness/contrast button ........4-9,4-18

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-35

Bulb check/instrument panel ..........2-8

Bulbreplacement................8-27

Warning signals ...............3-18

Interiorlight....................2-58

iPod®Player...............4-85,4-87

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-28

Jump starting ...............6-10,8-16

Key.........................3-2

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system).........3-13

Keys, For Intelligent Key system .........3-7

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....9-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-11

Emission control information label . . . . .9-11

Engine serial number ............9-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-11

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .....9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-66

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system . . .5-25

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system ....5-25

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-28

License plate

Installing the license plate ..........9-13

Liftgate......................3-23

Liftgaterelease.................3-26

Light

Air bag warning light .........1-66,2-12

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-27

Bulb check/instrument panel .........2-8

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Charge warning light .............2-9

Foglights...................8-26

Foglightswitch...............2-36

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-31

Headlight control switch ..........2-32

Headlights..................8-26

Interiorlight..................2-58

Lightbulbs..................8-26

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-10

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ..................2-11,2-24

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-57

Security indicator light............2-14

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ................2-8,2-13

Lights

Maplights ..................2-59

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Door locks ...................3-5

Gloveboxlock................2-50

Liftgaterelease...............3-26

Power door locks ...............3-6

Loose fuel cap warning .............2-25

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-23

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-10

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ....................2-11,2-24

Luggage hook ..................2-51

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ..........2-52

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-14

Maintenance

General maintenance .............8-2

Insidethevehicle...............8-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Outside the vehicle ..............8-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-24

Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4

Maintenance requirements ............8-2

Malfunction indicator light ............2-13

Maplights ....................2-59

Mappocket....................2-47

Memory Seat ...................3-34

Meters and gauges ................2-4

Instrument brightness control ........2-35

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror......

-32

Outside mirrors ...............3-32

Vanity mirror .................3-31

Mirrors ......................3-32

Moonroof ..................2-55,7-4

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-5

Odometer .....................2-5

10-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine oil .............8-10

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-11

Checking engine oil level ...........8-9

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6

Oneshotcall..............4-113, 4-125

Outside mirrors .................3-32

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Owner’s manual order form ...........9-33

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ....................9-33

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-21

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-93

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free

system .................4-109, 4-123

Power

Power door locks ...............3-6

Power outlet..............2-44,2-46

Power rear windows .............2-54

Power steering fluid .............8-12

Power steering system ...........5-94

Rear power windows ............2-54

Power inverter switch ..............2-44

Power outlet................2-44,2-46

Power steering ..................5-94

Power steering fluid ...............8-12

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................5-8

Precautions on booster

seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-40, 1-45

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-40, 1-45

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-16

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-48

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-4

Pre-tensioner seat belt system .........1-64

Push starting ...................6-12

Radio

Car phone or CB radio...........4-109

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player .....................4-68

Steering wheel audio control switch ....4-95

Rainsensor....................2-29

Readiness for inspection maintenance

(I/M) test .....................9-32

Rear power windows ..............2-54

Rear sonar system off switch ..........2-42

RearView Monitor ................4-21

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-31

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-30

Recorders

Eventdata..................9-32

Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-7

Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10

Remote Start ...............3-20,5-17

Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-31

Roadside assistance program ..........6-2

Roof rack .....................2-52

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Child seat belts . . . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-40, 1-45

Reporting safety defects (US only) .....9-31

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment .........1-3

Second row bench seats . . . . . . . .1-5, 1-7

Seatbackpockets................2-47

Seat belt

Child safety..................1-24

Infants and small children ..........1-25

Injured Person ................1-19

Largerchildren................1-25

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-16

Pregnant women...............1-19

Pre-tensioner seat belt system .......1-64

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Seatbelts...................1-16

Three-point type with retractor .......1-20

Seat belt extenders ...............1-23

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-19, 2-12

Seats

2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . .1-5, 1-7

Adjustment...................1-2

Armrests....................1-8

Automatic drive positioner..........3-34

Frontseats...................1-2

10-5

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-38, 2-40

Security indicator light..............2-14

Security system

(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),

enginestart..............2-26,5-15

Security systems

Vehicle security system ...........2-25

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-21

Service manual order form ...........9-33

Servicing air conditioner.............4-53

Spark plug replacement .............8-18

Spark plugs ...................8-18

Specifications ...................9-8

Speedometer ...................2-5

Speedometer and odometer ...........2-4

SRS warning label ................1-66

Stability control .................5-98

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-16

Jump starting .............6-10,8-16

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-4

Push starting .................6-12

Starting the engine .............5-16

Starting the engine ...............5-16

Steering

Heated steering wheel ...........2-41

Power steering fluid .............8-12

Power steering system ...........5-94

Steering wheel ..................3-29

Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-95

Stoplight.....................8-27

Storage......................2-47

Storagebin....................2-52

Sunglassescase.................2-47

Sunglassesholder................2-47

Sunroof...................2-55,7-4

Sun visors ....................3-31

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-66

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-66, 2-12

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-55

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-66

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-48

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-48

Switch

Autolightswitch...............2-33

Automatic power window switch ......2-55

Foglightswitch...............2-36

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-31

Headlight control switch ..........2-32

Instrument brightness control ........2-35

Power door lock switch ............3-6

Power inverter switch ............2-44

Rear sonar system off switch ........2-42

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-31

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-30

Steering wheel switch for audio

control/Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System ....................4-95

Turn signal switch ..............2-36

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-43

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27

Tachometer ....................2-6

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Theft

(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start ..............2-26,5-15

Three-way catalyst ................5-4

Tire

Flat tire .....................6-3

Spare tire ................

6-5, 8-41

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-12

Tire chains ..................8-38

Tire pressure .................8-31

Tire rotation..................8-38

Types of tires .................8-37

Uniform tire quality grading .........9-29

Wheels and tires...............8-31

Wheel/tire size.................9-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-10

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....5-5

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-30

Towing

Flattowing..................9-29

Towing load/specification ..........9-22

Towtrucktowing...............6-13

Trailer towing .................9-18

Towing a trailer ..................9-18

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . .2-60, 2-61, 2-62, 2-63,

2-63, 2-64

10-6

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-12

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-17

Travel (See registering your vehicle in another

country)......................9-10

Trip odometer ...................2-5

Turn signal switch ................2-36

Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-29

USB interface ...............4-80,4-81

Audio file operation ..........4-80,4-82

Video file operation .............4-83

Vanity mirror ...................3-31

Variable voltage control system .........8-17

Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-43

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-98

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ....5-98

Vehicle identification...............9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .......9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate....9-10

Vehicle immobilizer system ...........5-15

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-14

Vehicle recovery..............6-15,6-16

Vehicle security system .............2-25

(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start ..............2-26,5-15

Vents.......................4-44

Visors.......................3-31

Voice Prompt Interrupt ........4-113, 4-125

Voice recognition system ...........4-136

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-12

Anti-lock brake warning light .........2-9

Battery charge warning light .........2-9

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) warning

light......................5-32

Brake warning light ..............2-9

Distance Control Assist (DCA) .......5-72

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-10

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Lane Departure Prevention .........5-25

Lane Departure Warning light........5-25

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-25

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-23

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-10

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ..................2-11,2-24

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-57

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-19, 2-12

Supplemental air bag warning light .1-66, 2-12

TPMS......................2-4

Vehicle security system ...........2-25

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders................2-8,2-13

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-66

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders..................2-8,2-13

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-13

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-13

Warning lights .............2-8,2-13

Warning lights ...............2-8,2-13

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-30

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27

Weights (See dimensions and weights) .....9-9

Wheels and tires.................8-31

Wheel/tire size...................9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country .................9-10

Windows .....................2-53

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-54

Power rear windows .............2-54

Rear power windows ............2-54

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-27

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-30

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27

Wiperblades.................8-19

10-7

Produktspezifikationen

Marke:	Infiniti
Kategorie:	Auto
Modell:	QX60 (2015)

Brauchst du Hilfe?

Wenn Sie Hilfe mit Infiniti QX60 (2015) benötigen, stellen Sie unten eine Frage und andere Benutzer werden Ihnen antworten

Ihren Namen*

Deine E-Mail*

Schreiben Sie hier Ihre Frage

Bedienungsanleitung Auto Infiniti

Infiniti Q50 (2024) Bedienungsanleitung

29 August 2024

Infiniti I30 (2001) Bedienungsanleitung

28 Juli 2024

Infiniti I30 (2003) Bedienungsanleitung

22 Juli 2024

Infiniti Q70 (2016) Bedienungsanleitung

21 Juli 2024

Infiniti Q70 (2014) Bedienungsanleitung

16 Juli 2024

Infiniti Q70 Hybrid (2015) Bedienungsanleitung

13 Juli 2024

Infiniti IPL G Coupe (2011) Bedienungsanleitung

12 Juli 2024

Infiniti G37 (2009) Bedienungsanleitung

12 Juli 2024

Infiniti Q60 Convertible (2012) Bedienungsanleitung

12 Juli 2024

Infiniti QX60 (2013) Bedienungsanleitung

9 Juli 2024

Bedienungsanleitung Auto

Neueste Bedienungsanleitung für -Kategorien-

MG 3 (2022) Bedienungsanleitung

3 Dezember 2024

Porsche 911 Turbo S (2012) Bedienungsanleitung

30 November 2024

Porsche 911 Turbo (2011) Bedienungsanleitung

30 November 2024

BMW 3.0i Roadster (2003) Bedienungsanleitung

16 Oktober 2024

Mitsubishi Mirage (2019) Bedienungsanleitung

16 Oktober 2024

Nissan NV Passenger (2018) Bedienungsanleitung

16 Oktober 2024

Smart For two (2014) Bedienungsanleitung

15 Oktober 2024

Citroën DS (1965) Bedienungsanleitung

15 Oktober 2024

Volvo S90 T8 (2019) Bedienungsanleitung

15 Oktober 2024

Nissan Xterra (2015) Bedienungsanleitung

15 Oktober 2024